Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
Manager
No Ethernet Enhanced functionality
Application of the NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX system
for the management of equipment
of series ALS with ALCplus2e IDU
Release 1.9.0
User manual
MN.00276.E - 012
ALCplus2e Manager
Contents
Verify/assign the output queue to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3).....176
Verify the existing virtual LANs ................................................................................177
Create a virtual Lan ...............................................................................................177
Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan ...................................................................178
Delete a virtual Lan................................................................................................178
Ethernet Switch contextual area ..............................................................................179
General tab.....................................................................................................179
LLF tab ...........................................................................................................180
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab.....................................................................................180
Virtual Lan Config. tab ......................................................................................181
Ethernet Switch (info) ............................................................................................183
Construction of C-TAG on non-802.1Q LAN..........................................................183
Replacement of C-TAG in a packet with original C-TAG..........................................183
Construction of S-TAG (QinQ Double Tag) in a packet with C-TAG........................183
Analysing the priority .......................................................................................184
MAC Table ......................................................................................................184
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 ..........................................................................................186
Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN .............................................................187
Verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN .............................187
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN......................188
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the LAN ...................................188
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN .......189
Verify/modify the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN.............................189
Verify/modify the maximum throughput of data in output from LAN port .......................189
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN ....................................................190
Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN .............190
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism for the LAN..............................................................................................190
Verify/modify the interface type of the LAN ...............................................................190
Verify the existing PIRL instances for the LAN ............................................................191
Create a PIRL instance for the LAN...........................................................................191
Enable/disable a PIRL instance of the LAN .................................................................192
Modify a PIRL instance of the LAN ............................................................................192
Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN ............................................................................192
Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the LAN...........................................................192
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the LAN.............193
Verify/modify the behaviour of the LAN towards the packets in output ..........................193
Force the value of VID of the LAN to the default value ................................................194
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN ...................194
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the
output queue ........................................................................................................195
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LAN which,
in output, the Tag is added to..................................................................................195
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN ...............................195
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN .........196
Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN....................................................196
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol ...........................196
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN ...............................................197
Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP) .........................................................197
Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP) ..............................................197
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection ..........................198
Enable/disable the Ethernet Line Protection for the LAN ..............................................198
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Trunking mode.......................................199
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the LAN ...........................................................199
Verify the status and the configuration of the laser (LAN) ............................................199
Modify the enabling status of the laser (LAN).............................................................200
Modify the transmission mode of the laser (LAN)........................................................200
Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)............................................................201
Execute the test laser functioning status (LAN) ..........................................................201
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 contextual area..............................................................202
Interface tab ...................................................................................................202
Rate Limiter tab...............................................................................................204
VLan(802.1Q) tab ............................................................................................205
Priority Management tab ...................................................................................206
LLF tab ...........................................................................................................207
Line Loop tab ..................................................................................................208
STP/ELP Trunking tab .......................................................................................208
Laser Control tab .............................................................................................210
PIRL function (info) ................................................................................................212
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info) .........................................................................213
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info) ........................................................................214
Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment) ...................................214
Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node)...................................................215
Trunking mode (info) .............................................................................................217
Ethernet Trunking mode (LANs) .........................................................................217
Radio Trunking mode (Radio port - Port A) ..........................................................217
Bidirectional LLF (info)............................................................................................218
Port A, Port B..............................................................................................................219
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Radio port ....................................................220
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for
the Radio port .......................................................................................................220
Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the Radio port..................................................220
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the Radio port ....221
Verify/modify the behaviour of the Radio port towards the packets in output .................221
Force the value of VID of the Radio port to the default value .......................................222
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port ..........222
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the Radio port
to the output queue ...............................................................................................222
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the Radio port
which, in output, the Tag is added to........................................................................223
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the Radio port.......................223
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol ..................223
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the Radio port.......................................224
Verify/modify the priority of the Radio port (STP) .......................................................224
Verify/modify the connection cost of the Radio port (STP) ...........................................224
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Trunking mode ..............................224
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the Radio port ..................................................225
Port A, Port B contextual area .................................................................................226
Interface tab ...................................................................................................226
VLan(802.1Q) tab ............................................................................................226
Priority Management tab ...................................................................................228
10
11
12
Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch) .................339
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential) ..............339
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..............................................................................339
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .340
Radio Switch contextual area...................................................................................341
Radio switch (info) .................................................................................................342
Management of the radio switch ........................................................................342
Forcing a radio branch to operate (switch in reception and switch in transmission)....342
Preferential radio branch (switch in transmission).................................................342
SWITCH ...........................................................................................................................343
STM-1........................................................................................................................344
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch ........................344
Modify the management of the STM-1 switch.............................................................344
Modify the logic of STM-1 switch ..............................................................................345
Set the primary STM-1 as preferential ......................................................................345
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..............................................................................345
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .......345
STM-1 contextual area ...........................................................................................346
STM-1 switch (info)................................................................................................347
Management of the STM-1 switch.......................................................................347
STM-1 switching criteria....................................................................................347
Forcing of the STM-1 to operation ......................................................................347
Preferential primary STM-1 ...............................................................................347
Nodal.........................................................................................................................349
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch .........................349
Modify the management of the nodal switch ..............................................................349
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..............................................................................350
Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration...................................................................................................................350
Nodal contextual area ............................................................................................351
Nodal switch (info).................................................................................................352
Management of the nodal switch ........................................................................352
Forcing of the Nodal Bus to operation .................................................................352
Preferential NBUS (Nodal Bus) connection ...........................................................352
USER INPUT .....................................................................................................................353
Local User Input ..........................................................................................................354
Verify the local User Input status and configuration ....................................................354
Modify the name of a local User Input.......................................................................354
Modify the rest condition of a local User Input ...........................................................354
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local User Input ...............355
Local User Input contextual area..............................................................................356
Enabling the User Input alarms (info) .......................................................................357
Remote User Input ......................................................................................................358
Verify the remote User Input status and configuration ................................................358
Modify the name of a remote User Input ...................................................................358
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote User Input............358
Remote User Input contextual area ..........................................................................360
USER OUTPUT...................................................................................................................361
13
14
MANUAL CONTENT
Equipment of series ALS with ALCplus2e IDU can operate with Ethernet Enhanced functionality active or
inactive (see Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality).
In the first case, the GUI will contain the commands for the management of functionality Ethernet Enhanced; while in the second case the commands for the management of Ethernet functionality compatible
with ALCplus2 (Radio side) will be available.
This manual describes the commands and the functionalities of the ALCplus2e Manager application (release 1.9.0) when the management of Ethernet Enhanced is not active.
For the description of the available commands and functionalities when the management of Ethernet Enhanced is active, refer to user manual ALCplus2e Manager code MN.00275.E.
The release of the application can be verified opening the relevant WEB Craft Terminal page and selecting,
in the Equipment Menu area the Main > Equipment Properties command - General Info tab - Equip. Manager Ver parameter.
The use of the NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX supervision system and all the functions available for the system
administrator are reported in the relevant documentation.
In this manual, to make the writing easier, the wording:
WEB CT page identifies the WEB Craft Terminal page for ALCplus2e.
15
X Terminal
Browser
Web page
WEB CT
(ALCplus2e)
NMS
GUI
Internet (HTTP)
WS/Server
NMS
system
Equipment
network
Applic. X
Data Base
(Oracle)
16
Web Container
(e.g. Tomcat)
Applic. X
Application
ALCplus2e Manager
FUNCTIONALITIES
Besides the applications available in the NMS GUI at general level, the ALCplus2e Manager application allows, by means of the commands present in the WEB CT page, executing the following operations:
The properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, hardware, features key, etc.) and to
execute the reset of the equipment software (Equipment Properties).
The communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment and the
IP Access Control List (Port Configuration & ACL).
The stating Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment
(Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway) (Routing Table).
The static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway) (Stored Routing Table).
The automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment from a network element
and the Wake Up trap (SNTP & Wake Up Config.).
The SD memory card for the backup/restore of the equipment configuration and software (SD
Memory Management).
The equipment security protocols (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS and SNMPv3) (Security Config.).
The equipment general configuration (radio configuration, modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation, etc.) (Equipment).
The Ethernet Switch, Ring Protection mode (G.8032), TDM tributary and cross connection matrix
(TDM) (Base Band).
The LAN statistics, OAM, S/N, PRBS, radio loop and radio switch (Maintenance).
The switch of the STM-1 protected and of the Nodal Bus protected (Switch).
The manual operations and the relevant timeout (Equipment status area).
17
18
ALCplus2e Manager application program has been installed and enabled to operate.
The connection with the equipment has been activated AT LEAST one time.
The start-up of GUI, the procedure to graphically represent the network, to create and connect the NE objects is reported into the supervision system user manual.
1. In the map window of the supervision system, double click on the NE object or select the object, open
the pop-up menu and select Open.
The system opens the WEB CT page.
If the selected equipment is in:
Connected status and WEB LCT program is not connected to the equipment in Configuration
mode. The operating status (alarms) and the configuration pointed out into the page correspond
to the real condition present in the equipment.
Connected status and WEB LCT program is connected to the equipment in Configuration mode.
The operating status (alarms) and the configuration pointed out into the page could not correspond to those really present on the equipment.
Disconnected, unreachable or maintenance status. The operating status (alarms) and the configuration pointed out into the page correspond to the last known configuration.
Read & Write if, for the selected NE object, the considered page constitutes the first session open
in the current map or in another map.
Read Only if, for the selected NE object, the considered page does not constitute the first opened
session: at least one WEB CT page relevant to the selected NE object is already opened in the
current map or in another map.
In this condition, the user can both verify and modify the parameters.
When the page has Read Only access, the user can only verify the parameters.
WARNING The WEB CT page will be opened with Read Only access if the NE object (even if it is the first
opened session) is in disconnected, unreachable, maintenance status or if the WEB LCT program is connected to the equipment in Configuration mode.
19
WARNING The WEB CT page will be open with Read Only access (even if it is the first opened session) if
the equipment is in disconnected, unreachable or maintenance status or if the WEB LCT program is connected to the equipment in Configuration mode.
More WEB CT pages relevant to different ALCplus2e equipment, present in the same map or in different
maps, can be opened.
The system displays the message WARNING. ALCplus2e Manager <logic and physical address
of the equipment>: Forced Logout Superuser or an Error message (see Messages displayed in
the WEB CT page).
The WEB LCT program connects to the equipment in Configuration mode (see Local management program (WEB LCT).
The WEB CT page is automatically closed and opened when the system displays the message Equipment
in Maintenance mode
20
21
This area contains the commands to manage the equipment configuration (see Fig.2).
Commands
The symbol
identifies a command which, once selected, displays the parameters associated
to it in the context area (see Contextual area).
Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Menu area is displayed.
Press
22
2x1+0 Dual Pipe. Equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected
configuration and two Ethernet channels.
2x1+0 XPIC Dual Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and
two Ethernet channels.
LEFT
TABLE
(see Fig.2). Status and radio parameters of the transmitter and receiver.
Every row of the table corresponds to a radio branch for which is displayed:
Branch which the data present in the relevant row refer to:
The Tx2A and Rx2A boxes are present only for the equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) configuration.
The operating status of the branch is represented by the colour of the box:
ODU Hardware Failure. Hardware problem. E.g. check that the connection cable between the IDU and the ODU is not failure or missing.
RF channel number.
Power in input to the receiver (lines Rx) and in output to the transmitter (lines Tx).
In the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration, the wording Std-by is present in
the line Tx relevant to the StandBy branch.
Both the powers are measured at the antenna flange.
The wording Tx Off (row Tx1A/Tx2A) indicates that the transmitter is off due to an action
by the user (see Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter - selection of option Off
or Permanent Off) or due to the activation of one or more alarms which cause the switchoff of the transmitter (for instance, ...RT Vco Fail Alarm).
If the radio is not equipped (Radio System: [Unequipped]) the parameters present in this table
are not meaningful. In the area the Data Unavailable wording is displayed.
RIGHT TABLE. Current ACM profile and the radio transport (Tx/Rx) subdivision between Ethernet
and E1:
ACM Profile. Current ACM profile.
TDM Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to the TDM tributaries (E1, STM-1)
23
Press
Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Info area is displayed.
Press
24
Users/Connection area
Access box
Status box
LCT box
[Logged Users] parameter
[Logout] parameter
[Help] parameter
Access box
Mode to access the WEB CT page.
Options
Read & Write (green box). The user who accesses the page in this mode can:
The access in Read & Write mode to every WEB CT page relevant to the same equipment is assigned to one user at a time.
This user corresponds to the first NMS5UX authorized user who opens the WEB CT page in any
map managed by the supervision system.
Read Only (orange box) The user who accesses to the page in this mode can verify the equipment configuration parameters.
The access in Read Only mode for every WEB CT page relevant to the same equipment is assigned to all users who access the page after the first.
WARNING The user has access in Read Only mode even if he is the first user to open the page,
when the equipment is in status: disconnected, unreachable, maintenance or connected with the
local connection WEB LCT-equipment active in Configuration mode.
See also
Status box
Status of the NE object connection to the supervision system.
Options
Connected (green box). The NE object is in connected status. In this status, the user can:
Modify the configuration parameters of the equipment (only if the page has Read &
Write access and the WEB LCT program is not connected in Configuration mode to the
equipment).
Disconnected (red box). The NE object is in disconnected status. In this status, the user can:
Open the WEB CT page of the equipment with Read Only access.
Verify the equipment configuration parameters: the WEB CT page indicates the last
acquired equipment configuration.
25
Unreachable (red box). The NE object is in unreachable status. In this status, the user can:
Open the WEB CT page of the equipment with Read Only access.
Verify the equipment configuration parameters: the WEB CT page indicates the last
acquired equipment configuration.
Maintenance (red box). The NE object is in maintenance status. In this status, the user can:
Open the WEB CT page of the equipment with Read Only access.
When the NE is in maintenance status, the parameters in the WEB CT page are not meaningful,
because the maintenance status is a transitory status. To verify the parameters, it is suggested
to wait for the NE object passes from maintenance status to another status (connected, disconnected, unreachable). Moreover, no operation can be executed in this status.
LCT box
Status of connection between the local program WEB LCT and the equipment.
Options
Absent (light blue box). The local connection WEB LCT-equipment is not active. In this condition, the user can:
Modify the equipment configuration parameters (only if the page has Read & Write
access and the NE object is in connected status).
Monitor (green box). The connection WEB LCT-equipment is active in Monitoring mode. In this
condition, the user can:
Modify the equipment configuration parameters (only if the page has Read & Write
access and the NE object is in connected status).
Configuration (blue box). The connection WEB LCT-equipment is active in Configuration mode.
In this condition, the user can:
Locked (light blue box). The WEB LCT user is forbidden to connect to the equipment through
the WEB LCT program in Configuration mode. In this condition, the user can:
Modify the equipment configuration parameters (only if the page has Read & Write
access and the NE object is in connected status).
See also
26
Operations
No Timeout. Session timeout disabled. WEB CT session opened by the user (even if disconnected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time.
<number> Seconds. Session timeout enabled. WEB CT session opened by the user, if
disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.
With disconnected session we mean a WEB CT session whose relevant WEB CT has been closed
but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).
If the logout of a NMS5UX user is forced, the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system automatically executes the restore of the user login.
Operation available only for equipment using the protocol SNMPv1/v2c.
1. Select the [Logged Users] parameter.
2. Select the wished user.
3. Press Force Logout and confirm.
The system removes the line relevant to the selected user.
If the push-button is not available, this means that the record relevant to ones user has been selected.
[Logout] parameter
This parameter executes the logout of the current user.
27
When this parameter is selected, a message warns that the session has been closed as consequence of a
logout operation.
[Help] parameter
This parameter opens the help online of application.
28
In this area, you can display the remote equipment list stored in the equipment controller.
Parameters
or
The
symbol represents the equipment of type Managed by SCT, Elem. Manager, Not
Managed or Node X; the
symbol represents the equipment of type Remote Link (see
column Type).
The name of the equipment is automatically assigned by the application during the creation of the equipment itself: Equipment <progressive number>.
Within the station, the equipment are listed in increasing order with respect to the IP address.
IP Addr. IP address (Agent SNMP) of the equipment.
Type. Type of equipment:
Remote Link. Equipment, managed by WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application, constituting the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to
the local equipment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT).
Elem. Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where
the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).
Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list for instance the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one piece of equipment inserted
into an OSI network.
GENERAL
AREA
AREA
29
AREA
When the WEB page is opened, the Remote elements list area is hidden.
Press
See also
30
The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.
More information concerning the SCT/LMT program are reported into the relevant manuals.
31
Contextual area
This area is the part of the WEB CT page where the equipment parameters are displayed.
Its content changes accordingly to the selected command in the Equipment Menu area, which is indicated
in the top part of the contextual area.
Push-button
Apply. Selecting it makes the changes, executed on the parameters present in the contextual
area, effective.
Its selection opens a confirmation window. The confirmation windows are timed. When this period is elapsed (pointed out by the progress bar), if the user has not confirmed the operation,
the window is closed and the operation cancelled.
If the push-button is not available:
It is not possible to execute changes because the access to the page or connection
status of the equipment does not allow this (see Access box).
No parameter present in the window has been modified. In this case, the push-button
becomes available when the value of a parameter is changed.
Another push-button is present in the contextual area for the confirmation of the operation or the change of the parameters.
which contains them. These push-buttons are described in the paragraph relevant to the specific
command.
Tabs
For some commands, the parameters are subdivided in tabs. The selection of a tab dynamically
changes the content of the contextual area.
Parameters
The parameters present in the contextual area can be read-only or set or modified.
The description of the single commands (see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu) indicates
the parameters which can be modified and modalities to do that.
Generally, for the parameter setting, the following rules are valid:
32
URGENT <alarms number>. Number of Critical and/or Major alarms. Colour box:
Orange. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Major severity
Red. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Critical severity.
Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Critical or Major severity.
Light blue. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Warning severity.
Yellow. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Minor severity.
Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Minor or Warning severity.
Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A (the branch 2A does not
correctly work).
RADIO 2A. Status of the radio connection with branch 2A. Equipment configuration:
Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A (the branch 1A does not
correctly work).
Orange. The operating temperature of the equipment is between 75C and 80C.
33
Operations
The information present in the Equipment status area is updated every 5 seconds (timeout) if
the equipment is in connected status and is not connected to WEB LCT in Configuration mode
(see Update the information in the WEB CT page).
Press
to dynamically update information of the Events area and remove the detected and
cleared alarms (box White/Cleared).
Display/hide area
See also
Alarm management chapter of the user manual of ones supervision system NMS
34
Opening page
Equipment never connected. The equipment is disconnected and it has never been connected
from the moment of the creation of the relevant Network Element object.
The system does not open the WEB CT page. To open it, first it is necessary to activate the connection with the equipment at least once.
This happens because, when the supervisory system is not connected to equipment and the user
asks to open the relevant WEB CT page, the supervisory system itself takes the information concerning the configuration of its own database. If the equipment has never been connected, the
system has not any information concerning the configuration of such equipment into its own database, then it does not allow the opening of the page.
LCT in configuration mode. The WEB LCT program is connected to the equipment in Configuration mode (see LCT box). The page is opened in Read Only modality (see Access box). In this
mode, it is possible only to verify the equipment configuration.
Equipment unreachable. Equipment is unreachable. The system opens the WEB CT page, but
the displayed information could not correspond to the real configuration of the equipment.
Equipment disconnected. Equipment is disconnected. The system opens the WEB CT page, but
the displayed information could not correspond to the real configuration of the equipment.
Equipment in Maintenance mode. Please wait until the operation is completed or press OK button
to exit. Equipment is in transient status (maintenance). If you wish to cancel the operation
(opening of the WEB CT page) press OK, otherwise it is necessary to wait for the equipment
passing from the transitory status to another status (for example, connected) which allows the
opening of the page.
WARNING If the system displays other error messages that does not allow the opening of the
WEB CT page, as for instance Unable to register to Daemon, contact ones system administrator.
Open page
When the page is open, self-explanatory messages are usually displayed about the result of an operation or the impossibility to carry out an action because of the incongruence of the selected parameters.
Moreover, one of the following messages can be displayed:
Equipment in Maintenance mode. Please wait until the operation is completed or press OK button
to exit. The equipment is passed to transitory status (maintenance).
If you wish to close the WEB CT page press OK, otherwise wait that the equipment passes from
the transitory status to another one (for example, connected). In this second, the WEB CT page
is closed and automatically opened again.
ALCplus2e Manager <logic and physical address of the equipment>: Received a logout request
from User <user name> press OK to exit your manager session. WARNING! If you don't acknowledge this dialog in 30 seconds your session will automatically be closed. A NMS5UX user
has required the closing of the WEB CT page. Pressing:
Cancel, the system refuses the request: the page does not close.
OK or no button within 30 seconds from the message displaying, the system accepts
the request: the page closes.
WARNING. ALCplus2e Manager <logic and physical address of the equipment>: Forced Logout
Superuser. NMS5UX user with Superuser profile has forced the closing of the WEB CT page. The
displaying of this message automatically closes the page.
Message from Local Operator: Lom connected in config for NE <logic address of the equipment> Manager is going to be closed. The WEB LCT program is connected to the equipment in
Configuration mode (see LCT box). The display of this message automatically closes the WEB
CT page.
WEB LCT. The session has been terminated by logout operation. The WEB CT page has been
closed after the logout by the user or the automatic logout by the system after an action (for
example, WEB LCT has connected the equipment).
WARNING If the system displays other error messages that automatically close the WEB CT
page, such as for instance Daemon is Down. Manager is Closing, contact the involved system
administrator.
35
The WEB LCT program in Configuration mode is not connected to the equipment (see Local management program (WEB LCT).
If the NE object is in disconnected or unreachable status, the information displayed in the page (except for
the equipment status) refers to the last known configuration stored in the database of the supervision system.
If the WEB CT page is in Read Only mode, the alarms and the NE connection status are updated every 5
seconds.
The change of the NE configuration (after a change executed in the WEB CT page, it is in Read & Write
mode) is not dynamically signalled.
To update the data, the update of the page must be forced, selecting the command/push-button Refresh.
If the NE object is in connected status and the WEB LCT program is present in Configuration mode, the
information displayed in the page could not correspond to the real status of the equipment. In this case,
the NMS5UX user can check the equipment configuration but cannot change the parameters
When the WEB LCT user disconnects from the equipment, the supervisory system automatically forwards
a Configuration Upload command.
36
Read & Write. The user can both verify and modify the equipment configuration.
Read Only. The user can only verify the equipment configuration.
The access in Read & Write mode for every WEB CT page relevant to the same equipment is assigned to
only one user at a time.
This user is the first NMS5UX authorized user who opens the WEB CT page in any map managed by the
supervision system.
All the users who will then open the WEB CT page of the same NE object, will have the access in Read Only
mode.
WARNING The WEB CT page will be opened with Read Only access if the NE object (even if it is the first
opened session) is in disconnected, unreachable, maintenance status or the WEB LCT program is connected
to the equipment in Configuration mode.
If the NMS5UX user, whose access to the page is Read & Write, closes its WEB CT page, the Read & Write
access becomes available to all other users (Read Only) who have opened the WEB CT page relevant to
the same NE object.
The user who wish to change his own mode from Read Only to Read & Write must close and re-open the
WEB CT page.
The first user who will re-open the page will have Read & Write access.
The availability of Read & Write access is not signalled to the users who have opened the WEB CT page in
Read Only mode.
It is not possible to require or to force the closing of the WEB CT page in Read-Write mode, but it is possible
to require or force the closing of the relevant Manager application. For more information, refer to the user
manual of ones NMS supervision system.
37
In this mode, the WEB LCT user locally can verify the configuration and the parameters of the
equipment, but he cannot execute any change or require the execution of an operation.
The local activation of the connection WEB LCT-equipment in Monitoring mode does not affect
the acknowledge of the alarms or the transmission of the commands by the NMS system:
NMS5UX user can open the WEB CT page, verify the equipment configuration (get operations)
and modify parameters and send commands (set operations).
The activation and the deactivation of the local connection in Monitoring mode is spontaneously
communicated by the equipment to the NMS system and signalled to the user in the WEB CT
page (see LCT box) and in the NMS GUI (see relevant documentation).
Configuration mode
In this mode, the WEB LCT user can locally verify and modify the configuration and the parameters of the equipment which he is connected to.
When the connection WEB LCT-equipment is locally activated in Configuration mode, the NMS
can open the WEB CT page (which is opened with Read Only access) and verify the equipment
configuration (get operations), but he cannot modify parameters or send commands (set operations).
During the period when the connection is active in Configuration mode, no change relevant to
the alarms is signalled to the supervision system.
When the local connection between WEB LCT and equipment is deactivated, the NMS automatically executes a configuration re-alignment procedure (transmission of the command Configuration Upload) to acknowledge the possible changes executed by the local user and acquire
all the current alarm signals.
If the local connection WEB LCT-equipment in Configuration mode is activated when the relevant
WEB CT page is already opened, this page will be automatically closed by the supervision system.
The activation and the deactivation of the local connection in Configuration mode is spontaneously communicated by the equipment to the NMS system and signalled to the user in the NMS
GUI.
38
Operations
Verify the enabling status of the WEB LCT-equipment connection in Configuration mode
Forbid the WEB LCT user connecting to equipment in Configuration mode
Permit the WEB LCT user connecting to equipment in Configuration mode
Unlock, indicates that the WEB LCT user can activate the equipment connection both in Monitoring mode and in Configuration one.
Lock, indicates that the WEB LCT user can activate the equipment connection in Monitoring
mode only. The user is forbidden to connect to the equipment through the WEB LCT program in
Configuration mode.
Independently from the previous setting, when the NE object is disconnected, the parameter is automatically enabled (Unlock value).
39
The description of every single command indicates the modality to access to the WEB CT page necessary
to use the command or execute the relevant procedures.
For more information see Availability of commands in WEB CT page and Access box.
40
MAIN
Equipment Properties. It manages the properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, etc.) and
executes the equipment software reset.
Port Configuration & ACL. It manages the communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment and the IP Access Control List.
Routing Table. It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by
the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Stored Routing Table. It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in
the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Performance Monitoring. It manages the Performance Monitoring measures.
SNTP & Wake Up Config. It manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment from a network element and the Wake Up trap.
SD Memory Management. It manages the SD memory card for the backup/restore of the equipment
configuration and software.
Software Info & Maint. It manages the equipment firmware
Security Config.. It manages the equipment security protocols (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS and SNMPv3).
41
Equipment Properties
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
The Equipment Properties command manages the equipment properties and executes the equipment
software reset.
Operations
42
General Info tab. Equipment properties: type, ID, SNMP IP address, firmware version,
ALCplus2e Manager ID and version, date/time, communication stack.
Network tab. Equipment addresses: Ethernet port, LCT port, MAC address, IP Over OSI port,
NSAP.
Equipment Units tab. Equipment units.
Push-button
Network tab
The tab displays the equipment addresses.
Parameters
Ethernet IP Address. IP Address of the communication port with the LAN network (Ethernet
port).
Ethernet IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition of the Ethernet port.
Ethernet MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment.
LCT PPP IP Address. IP/PPP Address of the port for the connection to the PC (LCT port).
LCT PPP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition of the LCT port.
IP Over OSI. IP address of the internal communication port of the equipment for the interfacing
with the OSI router.
Parameter available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.
43
Real Type. Unit type really present into the equipment. The wording Unequipped indicates that
the unit is not physically present into the equipment.
Expected Type. Foreseen unit type. The wording Unequipped indicates that the unit is not foreseen.
HW Ver. Unit version.
Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
Par. Part Number. Part Number of the group that contains the unit. Usually the group represents the equipment part that can be replaced. Not all the unit are into a group. In this case the
field will result empty and the part that can be replaced will correspond to the unit itself.
Serial Number. Series Number of the group that contains the unit. If the unit is not contained
into a group (Par Part Num field empty), the Series Number refers to the unit.
Unit Alarms. Functional status of the unit. Each box identifies an alarm:
Missing. The unit is not present into the equipment (Unequipped wording - Real Type
parameter) also if it is foreseen (unit name - Expected Type parameter).
Not Resp. The unit does not answer to the program interrogations.
HW Mism. The real unit (Real Type parameter) is different from the foreseen one (Expected Type parameter).
SW Mism. The firmware version present into the controller of the peripheral unit (Actual Release) is different from the one of the memory bench in Running status (Release Bench) (see Verify the firmware version of the equipment).
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
44
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
The command Port Configuration & ACL manages the communication ports reserved to local and remote
supervision of the equipment, the control list of IP accesses (IP Access Control List) and allows resetting
the equipment software.
Operations
SUPERVISION
PORTS
RESET
45
46
The tab displays the remnant parameters for the configuration of the internal communication port which
interfaces with OSI router.
47
Ethernet tab. Configuration of the communication port with the LAN network.
LCT PPP tab. Configuration of the communication port for the connection to the PC where resides
the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Radio tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the radio signal.
Radio 1A tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 1A signal.
Radio 2A tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal or Radio
2A signal.
Line EOC tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
IP Over OSI tab / NSAP tab. Configuration of the internal communication port for the interfacing
with the OSI router.
ACL tab. IP Access Control List (ACL).
Push-button
Ethernet tab
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port with the LAN network.
Parameters
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level respectively: Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.
Enable - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling status of the specific LAN management:
mdi. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).
mdi-x. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch
modality).
auto. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.
Speed/Duplex - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed
used by the specific LAN management:
48
full duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.
half duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.
full duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.
half duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.
In Band Management - LAN. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to
the supervision is achieved by means of the traffic LANs and/or the Radio ports of the Ethernet
Switch). If the LAN/Port box is:
Not active (
Active (
Parameter available only if the Tagging procedure of management packets is not active (see
MNGT VLan Tagging).
In Band Management - VLan ID. VLan identifier reserved for the in band supervision:
Value different from 0. For the in band supervision, the VLan with the specific ID is
reserved.
Parameter available only if the Tagging procedure of management packets is not active (see
MNGT VLan Tagging).
MNGT VLan Tagging - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Activation status of the Tagging procedure of management packets in input/output from the specific LAN management:
Disable. The Tagging procedure is not active: the TAG is not managed for the management packets in input to/output from the LAN.
Enable. The Tagging procedure is active: the TAG is managed for the management
packets in input to/output from the LAN.
All the management packets in output from the equipment controller are tagged with
the VID value reserved for the Tagging procedure.
Enable Secure. The Tagging procedure is active: only the management packets with
VID value reserved for the Tagging procedure are accepted from the LAN.
Parameter available only if the in band supervision is not active (see In Band Management).
MNGT VLan Tagging - VLan ID. VLan identifier reserved for the Tagging procedure:
Value different from 0. For the Tagging procedure, the VLan with the specific ID is
reserved.
Parameter available only if the in band supervision is not active (see In Band Management).
See also
IP PPP Address. IP/PPP address of the port for the connection with the PC where resides the
SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
IP PPP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PC IP Address. IP address of the remote device:
49
For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 is assigned to the port, the address
10.10.10.9 will be automatically assigned to the remote device.
Choose IP Address. The address set by the user in the box is assigned to the remote
device.
The PPP operating mode is automatic: the port self-configures in Server mode and, when the
connection is set up, assigns the IP address to the remote device (see parameter PC IP Address).
Push-button
Radio tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the radio signal.
Parameters
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PPP Mode. Operating mode:
Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.
Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for
the remote device sets up the connection.
Bridge. Bridge connection (same IP network) between local and remote element.
Push-button
Radio 1A tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 1A signal.
50
Parameters
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PPP Mode. Operating mode:
Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.
Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for
the remote device sets up the connection.
Bridge. Bridge connection (same IP network) between local and remote element.
Push-button
Radio 2A tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 2A signal.
Parameters
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the Radio 2A signal.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PPP Mode. PPP operating mode:
Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.
Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for
the remote device sets up the connection.
Push-button
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
Parameters
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PPP Mode. PPP operating mode:
Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.
51
Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for
the remote device sets up the connection.
Signal Input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination:
EOC. Setting of the E1/timeslot used for the connection with the remote terminal:
2Mb Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used indicates
that the system does not use any tributary.
Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot. The wording Not Assigned indicates that
no timeslot has ever been selected.
Parameter available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input area.
Push-button
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol (see Tab.1).
The availability of the parameters present in the tab depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.2).
The tab displays some configuration parameters of the internal communication port for the interfacing with
the OSI router.
Parameters
IP Address. IP address of the internal port of the equipment, for the interfacing with the OSI
router.
IP Net Mask. Mask for the internal network address definition.
Line EOC. Usage modality of the timeslot relevant to an E1:
Parameter meaningful only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input box.
Signal Input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination:
Parameter meaningful only if it has been selected the User or Network value into the Line EOC
box.
EOC. Setting of the E1/timeslot used for the connection with the remote terminal:
2Mb Slot Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used indicates that the system does not use any tributary.
Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot. The wording Not Assigned indicates that
no timeslot has ever been selected.
Parameter available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input area.
Radio. Usage modality of the Radio channel:
52
See also
NSAP tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol (see Tab.1).
The tab displays the remnant parameters for the configuration of the internal communication port which
interfaces with OSI router.
Parameters
ACL tab
The tab displays the IP Access Control List (ACL).
Parameters
Status parameter indicates the use status of the IP Access Control List:
Enable. The use of the IP Access Control List is enabled: the access to the equipment
by other elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is allowed only if the IP address of the element matches the rules pointed out in the list.
Disable. The use of the IP Access Control List is disabled: the access to the equipment
by other elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is not defined by the rules pointed out in the
list.
Table. Rules used by the IP Access Control List. Each line identifies a rule:
Name. Name of the rule.
IP Address. IP subnetwork or single IP network which the rule refers to.
Mask. Netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork or to the IP address which the rule refers to.
Permission. Usage conditions of the rule:
53
The rules are sorted in alphanumeric order with respect to their name (Name column).
Push-button
54
(1)
PROTOCOL
In Band Management
option
Unequipped
Available
communication ports
Enable/Disable
Ethernet
LCT PPP
Line EOC
1+0
1+1 Freq. Div
1+1 Hot Standby
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option disable
Disable
Ethernet
LCT PPP
Radio
Line EOC
Enable
Ethernet
LCT PPP
Line EOC
Disable
Ethernet
LCT PPP
Radio 1
Radio 2
Enable
Ethernet
LCT PPP
OSI
Radio configuration
(1)
Unequipped
1+0
1+1 Freq. Div
1+1 Hot Standby
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option disable/enable
(1)
PROTOCOL
In Band Management
option
Available
communication ports
Enable/Disable
Ethernet
LCT PPP
IP Over OSI (IP Over OSI
and NSAP tabs)
See Configurator.
55
1+0
1+1 Freq. Div
1+1 Hot Standby
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option disable
(1)
56
In Band Management
option
Enable/Disable
IP Address
IP Net Mask
Line EOC
Signal Input
EOC
Disable
IP Address
IP Net Mask
Line EOC
Signal Input
EOC
Radio
Enable
IP Address
IP Net Mask
Line EOC
Signal Input
EOC
Disable
IP Address
IP Net Mask
Radio 1
Radio 2
Enable
IP Address
IP Net Mask
See Configurator.
57
Routing Table
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING When all pieces of equipment belongs to the same IP network and sending packets to other networks is not necessary, the Routing Table and the address of the Gateway equipment must not be necessarily defined because the network can manage its own internal traffic.
Setting the Routing Table and Default Gateway is necessary when equipment must send packets between
two different networks, then the traffic must be re-routed from a network to another one (routing functionality of the equipment).
The Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Operations
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment
GUI
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
58
Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.
Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Radio 2A/Line EOC. Communication port represented by the 2A radio signal or 2Mb
EOC communication port.
The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI). The
current setting of the parameters relevant to each port can be verified selecting Main > Port
Configuration & ACL.
Protocol. Modality of connection (direct or indirect) between specific port (Interface) and destination IP network:
Local. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equipment interface. The IP network or the element are automatically inserted by the equipment software.
NetMgmt. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the equipment interfaces. The IP network or the element have been manually inserted by the
user (static element).
Ospf. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the equipment
interfaces. The IP network or the element have been manually inserted by the OSPF
protocol (dynamic element).
Other. All the other situations that are not comprised into one of the previous cases
(this label generally does not shown; it has been anticipated for future uses).
Default Gateway. IP address of the equipment that acts as Running Default Gateway. The following box indicates the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment corresponds to.
Push-button
59
Routing Table
The function of the Routing Table is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages
exchanged among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one
network to the other one.
Running Routing Table
Each equipment at its initialization (start-up operation) automatically sets the elements
of the Routing Table that identify the supervisory ports of the equipment (communication
ports provided with the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal).
These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port.
If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically
change it into the equipment Routing Table. It is necessary to execute a reset of the
equipment, because the elements of the Routing Table are set at the equipment start-up.
If it is necessary, the user can add to these elements (automatically set) some other
ones.
The system records each new element (manually set) into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment controller
(Stored Routing Table); the system does not record the elements (automatically set) into
the backup memory of the controller because they are newly set at every equipment
start-up.
The Running Routing Table is a static one. The system updates such a table, through the
elements present into the Stored Routing Table, at every equipment start-up.
Stored Routing Table
The equipment does not currently use the Stored Routing Table. This table becomes operative on the equipment restart.
In fact, in this case, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the
Routing Table used by the equipment (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid
only for the elements whose router equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface.
The setting of the Stored Routing Table id necessary, for instance, when the user wants
to change an address of the equipment supervisory ports.
In such a case, it is not possible to change the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table).
The changes have to be inserted into the Stored Routing Table. At the next equipment
start-up, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing
Table used by the equipment.
Default Gateway
The system forwards to the equipment with the Default Gateway function the data that have a
receiver unreachable through the routes present into the Routing Table.
60
The Stored Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address
stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Operations
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory of the controller
GUI
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory
of the controller
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
61
Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.
Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Radio 2A/Line EOC. Communication port represented by the 2A radio signal or 2Mb
EOC communication port.
The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI). The
current setting of the parameters relevant to each port can be verified selecting Main > Port
Configuration & ACL.
Protocol. Parameter not meaningful in this context.
Default Gateway. IP address of the equipment that acts as Stored Default Gateway. The next
box indicates the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment corresponds
to.
Push-button
62
Performance Monitoring
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
PM measures
PM measures (info)
Status. Status of the measure: active (wording Running), inactive (wording Not running).
For the description of the View/Modify P.M. Status window refer to the user manual of the NMS supervision system.
The measures present in the Termination Point area, select Action > Start > Filtered.
The measures selected in the Termination Point area, select Action > Start > Selected.
63
In the Attributes Manager window, select the group (P.M. <measure name>) and than the
wished measure.
The Start Stop box displays the status of the measure: Start (measure active), Stop (measure
not active).
In the Start Stop box, set the Start value and press Send Set.
For the description of the View/Modify P.M. Status and Attributes Manager window refer to the user
manual of the NMS supervision system.
The measures present in the Termination Point area, select Action > Stop > Filtered.
The measures selected in the Termination Point area, select Action > Stop > Selected.
For the description of the View/Modify P.M. Status and Attributes Manager window refer to the user
manual of the NMS supervision system.
The results of the PM measures of equipment can be displayed selecting the relevant NE object in the map
window and then the Performance > Performance Monitoring command.
For the description and use of the Performance Monitoring command refer to the user manual of the
NMS supervision system.
64
Num. SES to set UAS. Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with SES - beyond which UAS unavailability period starts.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10) and press Send Set.
Num. SES to reset UAS. Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without SES
- beyond which UAS unavailability period starts.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 10 sec. (default 10) and press Send Set.
Percent. BBE to set SES. Threshold - expressed as percentage of the errored blocks - beyond
which SES is declared.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 100% (default 30%) and press Send Set.
15 Min SES Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 15M Ses.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour SES Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 24H Ses.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set.
15 Min SEP Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 15 minute period
- over which it is activated the alarm 15M Sep.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
65
24 Hour SEP Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 24 hour period
- over which it is activated the alarm24H Sep.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
If G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 or G828 Vc12 STM-1 measure is selected, the window displays the following parameters:
66
Num. SES to set UAS. Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with SES - beyond which UAS unavailability period starts.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10) and press Send Set.
Num. SES to reset UAS. Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without SES
- beyond which UAS unavailability period starts.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 10 sec. (default 10) and press Send Set.
Percent. BBE to set SES. Threshold - expressed as percentage of the errored blocks - beyond
which SES is declared.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 100% (default 30%) and press Send Set.
15 Min SES Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 15M Ses.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour SES Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 24H Ses.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set.
15 Min SEP Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 15 minute period
- over which it is activated the alarm 15M Sep.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour SEP Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 24 hour period
- over which it is activated the alarm24H Sep.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min ES Far End Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 15M Es FE.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min SES Far End Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 15M Ses FE.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour ES Far End Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 24H Es FE.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour SES Far End Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm 24H Ses FE.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min SEP Far End Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP FE events within a 15
minute period - over which it is activated the alarm 15M Sep FE.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour SEP Far End Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP FE events within a 24
hour period - over which it is activated the alarm 24H Sep FE.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
If RxPwr Radio measure is selected, the window displays the following parameters:
24 Hour Rlts1 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT1 threshold level - over which the system activates the 24H Rlts1 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm
24 Hour Rlts2 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT2 threshold level - over which the system activates the 24H Rlts2 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour Rlts3 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT3 threshold level - over which the system activates the 24H Rlts3 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm
24 Hour Rlts4 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT4 threshold level - over which the system activates the 24H Rlts4 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour Rlts5 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT5 threshold level - over which the system activates the 24H Rlts5 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min Rlts1 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT1 threshold level - over which the system activates the 15M Rlts1 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 9400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min Rlts2 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT2 threshold level - over which the system activates the 15M Rlts2 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 9400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min Rlts3 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT3 threshold level - over which the system activates the 15M Rlts3 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 9400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min Rlts4 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT4 threshold level - over which the system activates the 15M Rlts4 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 9400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min Rlts5 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the received power is lower than the RLT5 threshold level - over which the system activates the 15M Rlts5 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 9400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
Received Power Level Threshold 1. The first threshold level of the received power.
To change the parameter set a value between -100dBm and -20dBm and press Send Set.
Received Power Level Threshold 2. The second threshold level of the received power.
To change the parameter set a value between -100dBm and -20dBm and press Send Set.
Received Power Level Threshold 3. The third threshold level of the received power.
To change the parameter set a value between -100dBm and -20dBm and press Send Set.
Received Power Level Threshold 4. The fourth threshold level of the received power.
To change the parameter set a value between -100dBm and -20dBm and press Send Set.
Received Power Level Threshold 5. The fifth threshold level of the received power.
To change the parameter set a value between -100dBm and -20dBm and press Send Set.
67
If TxPwr Radio measure is selected, the window displays the following parameters:
24 Hour Tlts1 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 24H Tlts1 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour Tlts2 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT2 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 24H Tlts2 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour Tlts3 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT3 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 24H Tlts3 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour Tlts4 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT4 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 24H Tlts4 alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min Tlts1 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 15M Tlts1 alarms.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min Tlts2 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT2 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 15M Tlts2 alarms.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min Tlts3 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT3 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 15M Tlts3 alarms.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min Tlts4 Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT4 threshold level - over which the system
activates the 15M Tlts4 alarms.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
Tx Power Level Threshold 1. The first threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change the parameter set a value between -40dBm and 35dBm and press Send Set.
Tx Power Level Threshold 2. The second threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change the parameter set a value between -40dBm and 35dBm and press Send Set.
Tx Power Level Threshold 3. The third threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change the parameter set a value between -40dBm and 35dBm and press Send Set.
Tx Power Level Threshold 4. The fourth threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change the parameter set a value between -40dBm and 35dBm and press Send Set.
If ACM Radio measure is selected, the window displays the following parameters:
68
15 Min 4QAM Str Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the 15M 4QAM
Strong alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 15M 4QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period,
when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the 15M 8PSK alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the counter 16QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 15M 16QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min 32QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the counter 32QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 15M 32QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15 Min 64QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the counter 64QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 15M 64QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour 4QAM Str Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 4QAM
Strong alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 4QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 8PSK alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 16QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 16QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour 32QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 32QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 32QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour 64QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 64QAM has increased- over which it is activated the 24H 64QAM alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour 128QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 128QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 128QAM
alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24 Hour 256QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 256QAM has increased - over which it is activated the 24H 256QAM
alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0) and press Send Set. The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
69
Active Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is equal to the currently active
one, are increased.
Not Available Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is higher than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation), are
increased.
70
71
PM measures
The measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
The measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following quality parameters:
Byte B2
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
72
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
Byte M1
BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected
at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.
ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote
blocks.
SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of
errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated
an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm).
SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES
FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE.
UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds. The counting
of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted into
the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.
Byte B2 and M1
UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) unavailability seconds.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented according
to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
The G828 Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
The measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 (tributary A or B) at
line side.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
73
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
To execute this measure, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the G.704 Rec.
The measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 (tributary A or B) at
internal side.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
Measure not available if the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.).
The measure checks the quality of the received VC-12 into the STM-1.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
74
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected
at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.
ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote
blocks.
SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of
errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated
an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm).
SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES
FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE.
UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds. The counting
of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted into
the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.
UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) unavailability seconds.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented according
to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is equal to
the one currently active.
Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is higher
than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation).
Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and the current modulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is:
75
Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.
The mode used to increase the counters of the ACM profiles is common to all the counters and must be
selected by the user.
The RxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure checks the power of the signal at reception.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
Average Level. Average level of the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15
min or 24 hours).
Rlts (Received Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at reception (RL - Received Level) is lower than the pre-defined threshold
level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 5 threshold levels.
The parameters are implemented according to the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.
The TxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure checks the power of the signal at transmission.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
Average Level. Average level of the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period
(15 min or 24 hours)
Tlts (Transmitted Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at transmission (TL - Transmitted Level) is higher than the pre-defined
threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 threshold levels.
The parameters are implemented according to the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.
76
PM measures (info)
A PM measure consists of recording, during a pre-defined time range (observation period), the values of
specific parameters.
Some threshold limits have been assigned to such control parameters (the setting of the thresholds can
be changed).
The exceeding of the threshold limit indicates a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condition generates an alarm.
The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the application as
normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the threshold limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind of alarms.
The control parameters under examination change according to the equipment type and to the measure
type supported by that type of equipment. Usually, all the executed measures refer to ITU-T Recommendations (for instance G.828, G.826, etc.).
The activation (and the deactivation) of the PM measures can be executed only after a command forwarded
by the user.
When it has been activated a PM measure, the main controller of the equipment starts the storing of the
values relevant to the control parameters. The results of the measures are sub-divided into records. Each
record contains the values recorded into a specific time range (observation period).
If at the end of the observation period, the measure has not yet been deactivated the system starts another
observation period and so on until when the operator stops the measure.
The equipment group the results of the PM measures into observation period of 15 minutes (primary records) and of 24 hours (daily records).
The observation periods can not be synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated but such
records refer, for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the
daily records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated).
For instance, if a measure starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation period the time
11.4011.45 (corresponding to the time range 11.3011.45), while the first daily record will have as observation period 11.4000.00.
For each type of measure, the equipment keeps stored the current records and also the last 16 primary
records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily one (corresponding to the preceding day).
The preceding records are overwritten.
When the operator stops a measure, the system stores the uncompleted current record.
If the operator activates and deactivates the measure more times during the same observation period, the
system will store the record that contains the results of the last executed measure.
For instance if the measure has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it has been newly
activated at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.009.15 will contain the results of the
measures relevant to the period 9.099.15, while the ones relevant to the period 9.029.07 will not be
stored.
If equipment has some PM measures on progress and it is re-started up or turned off, when it will successively restarted or turned on the measures activated before the turning off will be automatically re-started.
The records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when measure has been stopped, will result empty
and when it has been reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily one, they will overwrite the preceding records.
77
The SNTP & Wake Up Config. command manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time
of the equipment from a network element (SNTP functionality) and the Wake Up trap (Wake Up functionality).
Operations
78
SNTP tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the SNTP functionality.
Parameter
Main Server IP Address / Reserve Server IP Addr. Activation status and IP address of the
main NE (Main) and of the secondary NE (Reserve) present in the network which the equipment
automatically gets the reference date/time from. The automatic acquisition of the reference
date/time of the equipment is:
Active, when a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) is present in the Main Server IP
Address and/or Reverse Server IP Address box.
Inactive, when the value 0.0.0.0 (IP address reset) is present in the boxes Main Server IP Address and Reverse Server IP Address.
Polling Interval (Sec.). Time interval (expressed in seconds) between a request of reference
date/time update and the next one.
Polling Timeout (Sec.). Time interval (expressed in seconds) that the equipment must wait
before re attempting the transmission of a request to the main or secondary element.
Polling Retries. Number of times that the equipment must re attempt the transmission of a
request to the main or secondary element.
NTP Server Lost Alarm. The activation of the NTP Server Lost Alarm indicates that none of the
set network elements is reachable, as consequence the reference date/time of the equipment is
not aligned. The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
See also
79
Wake Up tab
WARNING Tab meaningful only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.
Status. Transmission status of Wake Up trap. The sending of the Wake Up trap is:
Active, when the Enable option is selected and a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0)
is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).
Inactive, when the Disable option is selected and the value 0.0.0.0 is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).
NMS IP Address. IP address of the server which the Wake Up trap must be sent to. With server
we mean the machine where the supervision system NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX or a different management system, able to manage the reception of the Wake Up trap, is installed.
Gosip Address. NSAP address (Gosip) of the server which the Wake Up trap must be sent to.
Parameter meaningful and available only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network.
Timeout (Minutes). Time interval for which the Wake Up trap, when enabled, is sent to the
server. The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually
disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
NE Location. Optional parameter. The user can insert the physical location (for example the
name of the site) of the equipment in this field. This information is communicated to the remote
manager together with the characteristics of the equipment. The supervision system NMS5UXB or NMS5LX does not use this information.
See also
80
81
protocol (info).
The Wake Up functionality allows the user enabling the spontaneous forward, from the equipment to a remote server, of a SNMP trap for the notification of the equipment commissioning (Wake Up trap).
This functionality has been implemented as help to the Auto Discovery modality available in the supervision
systems NMS5UX-B and NMS5LX.
The Auto Discovery mode has the purpose to point out new equipment in the network, not managed by
the supervision system yet. More information about the Auto Discovery modality is reported in the relevant
documentation.
This chapter shows only the management of the Wake Up trap by the equipment. The implementation of
the Wake Up functionality is the following.
Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible:
Define the IP address and the NSAP address (meaningful only if equipment and server are inserted within an OSI network) of the server where the supervision system, which the trap must
be sent to (NMS IP Address option - Wake Up tab) is installed.
Define the time interval for which the trap must be sent, after which the sending of the trap is
automatically disabled (Timeout option).
If the value 0 is set for the Timeout option, the Wake Up trap will be sent until when the user
manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
When the Wake Up functionality is activated, the equipment starts sending the Wake Up trap every minute
for the time interval defined by the user (Timeout option). For example, if the value 60 has been set as
timeout, the trap is sent each 60 minutes. At the end of 60 minutes, the sending of the trap is automatically
disabled.
If, in the period when the sending of the trap is enabled, the supervision system intercepts the Wake Up
notification records the presence of the new equipment in its database and disables the sending of the
Wake Up trap by the equipment (trap switch-off).
See also
82
SD Memory Management
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
The SD Memory Management command manages the SD memory card (Secure Digital Memory Card)
for the backup/restore of the equipment software and configuration.
Operations
SD
This operation is very important because it avoids the equipment re-configuration necessary after a change
of the IDU unit.
Here below the whole procedure is described, which must be applied so that the automatic equipment restart from SD is successful.
1. Save the equipment configuration and software to the SD:
a. Insert the SD in the equipment.
b. Open the WEB CT page relevant to the equipment.
c. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
d. Press Create BOOT SD and confirm.
The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD, the following operations are executed in this order:
83
Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running).
If the operation has been successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the
parameter Type assumes the value Boot SD.
e. Press:
Enable automatic restore (all) and confirm, to enable the automatic equipment restart from SD: at the restart, both the configuration data and the equipment software
will be pasted from the SD to the new controller.
Enable automatic restore (Data only) and confirm, to enable the automatic equipment restart from SD: at the restart, only the configuration data will be pasted from the
SD to the new controller.
If the operation has been successful and, in the previous step, the selected command was:
Enable automatic restore (all), the parameters Automatic data restore from SD and Automatic SW download from SD assume the value Enabled.
Enable automatic restore (Data only), the parameter Automatic data restore from SD assumes the value Enabled.
At this point, if the SD is not removed from the equipment, the controller activates the automatic synchronisation of the data: this means that every configuration change is automatically saved even to the
SD.
If the equipment software is updated, this is not automatically saved into the SD. Moreover, the procedure for the automatic restart is aborted (the parameters Enable automatic restore (all) and/or Enable automatic restore (Data only) assume the value Disabled). In this case, it is suggested to execute
again this procedure in order to enable again the SD to the automatic restart.
2. As soon as the equipment becomes faulted and the IDU unit needs to be replaced, switch off the malfunctioning IDU, remove the SD card and insert it in the new IDU unit.
3. Install and switch the new IDU unit on.
Before copying the equipment and sw configuration into the new controller, the following checks are
executed:
The value of EC serial number (present in the descriptor file of SD) must be different from that
stored in the equipment controller.
In the descriptor file of the SD, the automatic restart from SD must be active (parameter Automatic SW download from SD and/or Automatic data restore from SD - value Enabled).
In case of automatic restart enabled only for the configuration data (selection of the Enable automatic restore (Data only) command - see step 1e), the configuration data stored in the SD
must be referred to equipment sw version older than or equal to that currently active in the controller.
The Enable automatic restore (all) command has been selected at step 1e.
The running version of the equipment software (Running) is different from that present
in the SD.
c. The Serial Number of the controller present in the descriptor file of the SD is updated.
d. The Serial Number of the equipment controller is updated.
e. The controller with change of the memory bench in use (Bench Switch) is forced to restart if
even the sw update (selection of the Enable automatic restore (all) command - see step 1e) has
been required.
f. The controller restarts with the updated sw (if required) and applying the configuration data read
from the SD.
84
If at least one of the above mentioned checks was not successful, the automatic restart is not executed
and the controller stays in status Replaced Controller waiting for an intervention of the user.
Here below the whole procedure, which must be applied in order that the automatic update of the equipment sw from SD is successful, is described.
1. Save the equipment software master to the SD:
a. Insert the SD into the equipment where the new sw version is present.
b. Open the WEB CT page relevant to the equipment
c. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
d. Press Create Sw DWL SD and confirm.
The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD, the following operations are executed in this order:
Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running).
If the operation was successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the parameter Type assumes the value Sw download SD.
e. Press Enable automatic restore and confirm, in order to enable the automatic update of the
equipment sw from SD on the equipment restart.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Automatic SW download from SD assumes the
value Enabled.
f. Press Enable Not running Sw delete and confirm, if you wish that, once the update and the
change of the memory bench of the controller are ended, the sw present in the bench StandBy
(bench where the old sw is present), is automatically deleted.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Not running Sw delete assumes the value Enabled.
2. Switch the equipment off, remove the SD card and insert it into another equipment whose software you
wish to update.
The removal of the SD card can be executed even with equipment on. In this case, the integrity of the
data present on the memory is not ensured, because when the equipment is on, the system performs
writing operations in background on SD card. The removal of the memory during one of these operations could damage the data present in the memory itself.
3. Switch the IDU unit on.
Before copying the equipment sw into the new controller, the following checks are executed:
The automatic update from SD must be active in the descriptor file of the SD (parameter Enable
automatic restore).
The sw version stored in the SD must be different from both the versions present in the memory
benches of the controller.
85
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after
an automatic sw update from SD
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present.
Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD to
the controller
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Boot SD are present.
Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present.
86
Status. SD status:
SD status
Presence of SD in
the equipment
Compatibility SD data
structure - equipment
Loaded
Yes
Yes
Yes
Equipment Type
Mismatch
Yes
Yes
No
Not formatted
Yes
No
No
Not Present
No
Boot SD. The SD contains the equipment configuration parameters and the equipment software.
Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present or memory data structure not
recognized/compatible with the equipment, etc.).
Automatic data restore from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the configuration data from
SD:
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD.
Automatic SW download from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the equipment software
from SD:
Disabled. The automatic update of the equipment software from SD is not enabled.
Not running Sw delete. Enabling of the automatic deletion of the equipment software present in the StandBy memory bench (status Loaded - see Software Info & Maint.) after an automatic sw update from SD:
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Sw Dwl SD.
EC serial number. Serial number of the controller which has generated the version of the data
and equipment software present in SD.
The empty field indicates that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD.
EC system version. File name and version of the equipment software currently used by the
controller which has generated the version of Boot SD present in the SD.
The empty field shows that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD.
SW system version. File name and version of the equipment sw present in the SD.
The empty field shows that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
In the left part of the contextual area, the commands for the management of SD are displayed. Tab.3 lists the commands. For every command, the use, depending on the data present
in the SD, and the mean times for the execution of the operation are pointed out.
The No actions available! wording shows that the SD is not present.
87
Push-button
88
What just said is valid only for the information with data structure recognized by ALCplus2e equipment and
relevant management programs (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX). Any other type of data
stored in SD (user file) is not deleted or damaged by the commands described in this chapter.
When the user saves the configuration parameters and/or the equipment software on SD, the following file
data structure is automatically created:
Root
Descriptor.txt. Descriptor file of text type, where the characteristics of the data present in the
SD are present: type of equipment the data refer to, type of data in SD (Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD),
etc.
This information is used by the management software to execute the compatibility checks between the data of the SD and the equipment where the SD is inserted.
Backup. Backup file of the equipment configuration parameters
Software. Files of equipment software (equipment Sw/Fw + WEB LCT)
If SD is of type Sw Dwl SD, the directory Backup will be empty.
ALCplus2e equipment supports the following cards:
89
As help for the management of SD, by means of the SD Memory Management contextual area, the following can be executed:
Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after an automatic sw update from SD
Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD to the controller
Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
SD memory card (info)
Time
(1)
It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment configuration parameters and
equipment sw (Boot SD) from the controller to the SD
5 min.
It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment sw (Sw Dwl SD)
from the controller to the SD
5 min.
1/2 min.
Delete SD files
Copy Sw from SD
5 min.
Enable automatic
restore (all)
1/2 sec.
Enable automatic
restore (Data only)
1/2 sec.
Enable automatic
restore
1/2 sec.
Disable automatic
restore
1/2 sec.
90
Command
Enable
Not running
Sw delete
1/2 sec.
Disable
Not running
Sw delete
1/2 sec.
Force automatic
restore
5 min.
(1)
Time
(1)
Deletion of data
The SD card supplied with the equipment is ready for use (formatting not needed).
Once used for the first time, the data stored in the SD card can be deleted using the commands
present in WEB LCT (see Commands for the management/maintenance of SD).
It is suggested never to format the card, because a wrong formatting (unknown format) will prevent the SD card to work correctly.
Removal of SD card
It is suggested to remove the SD card from the equipment only after it has been switched off.
Only in this way, we are sure not to damage the data stored in the card because, when the
equipment is on, writing operations are performed in background on SD card.
The removal of the memory during one of these activities could damage the data present in the
memory itself.
91
The Software Info & Maint. command manages the equipment firmware.
Operations
Usually, the switch of the memory benches of main controller does NOT interrupt the traffic. This operation
can temporarily interrupt the traffic if the new loaded version contains a new FPGA version.
1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.
2. Press Bench Switch and confirm.
The equipment is restarted; on the reconnection, the bench in Running status is forced to Loaded status
and vice versa.
92
FIRST
TABLE.
Software Version. File name and version of the equipment firmware respectively present on
the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column).
Bench Status. Functioning status of the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2
column):
Loaded. The firmware is present into the bench but actually it is not on progress
(StandBy).
Not Loaded. The firmware is not present into the memory bench.
Downloading Status. Status of the update operation of the firmware respectively present on
memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column):
SECOND TABLE. List of the codes and of the FPGA files that compose the equipment firmware. Every row
corresponds to a firmware element (code or FPGA) for which is pointed out in the column:
Unit. Name of the unit or of the equipment part where there is the controller (code) or the programmable device (FPGA file).
Software. Firmware name. Usually the name shows the component type:
FW_Boot. Boot code. This part of code can not be updated in fact it is not provided
with a version of the memory benches.
Actual Release. Version of the code or of the FPGA file present into the controller.
For some elements, the system shows the version and also the relevant identification code composed by the letter E or N followed by a number (each number identifies a different code type).
Release Bench 1. Firmware version present into the memory bench 1 of the controller.
Release Bench 2. Firmware version present into the memory bench 2 of the controller.
93
Push-button
94
95
Security Config.
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the Security package functionality is enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or more
features can be enabled.
The Security Config. command manages the equipment security protocols (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS and
SNMPv3).
Operations
Verify the security protocols of the equipment (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS, SNMPv3)
Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode
Activate the equipment management in Not Secure Mode
Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode)
SSH
Configure the SSH protocol
GUI
Security (info)
SSH protocol (info)
HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info)
FTP/SFTP protocol (info)
SNMP protocol (info)
Verify the security protocols of the equipment (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS, SNMPv3)
Access | Read & Write
96
Yes and confirm if you wish not to apply the protocol change but to apply possible changes to
other configuration parameters.
No and confirm if you wish to apply the protocol change. The operation restarts the equipment.
Yes and confirm if you wish not to apply the protocol change but to apply possible changes to
other configuration parameters.
No and confirm if you wish to apply the protocol change. The operation restarts the equipment.
Yes and confirm if you wish not to apply the protocol change but to apply possible changes to
other configuration parameters.
No and confirm if you wish to apply the protocol change. The operation restarts the equipment.
97
The active box ( ) indicates that the specific version 2 of the SSH protocol is managed by the equipment; the inactive box indicates that the version is not managed.
3. To set the public key asymmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select
the box (parameter SSH Host Key):
DSA (only v2). DSA (Digital Signature Algorithm) key cypher algorithm.
Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of SSH protocol.
The active box (
aged.
) indicates that the specific key is manage; the inactive box that the key is not man-
HMAC - SHA-1. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) based on hash code
(HMAC).
HMAC - SHA1 - 96. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 with 96 bit digest based on hash code
(HMAC).
HMAC - MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.
The active box ( ) indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the algorithm
is not managed.
If the None box is active, no algorithm is managed.
The activation of None box automatically deactivates all the other boxes. The activation of at least one
box HMAC... automatically deactivates the box None.
5. To set the symmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select the box
(parameter Cipher Algorithm):
3DES - CBC. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based on the repetition of DES algorithm for three times.
AES 128, 192, 256 (only v2) - CBC. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm
with 128 bit key (AES 128), 192 bit key (AES 192) or 256 bit key (AES 259).
Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of the SSH protocol.
The active box ( ) indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the algorithm
is not managed.
If the None box is active, no algorithm is managed.
The activation of None box automatically deactivates all the other boxes. Moreover it deactivates the
option V1 (parameter SSH Version).
The activation of at least one 3DES.../AES...box automatically deactivates the box None.
6. Press Apply and confirm.
98
Parameters
PROTOCOLS
AREA
Available. The equipment manages the FTP and Telnet protocols (Not Secure Mode)
and the SFTP and SSH protocols (Secure Mode).
Unavailable. The equipment manages only the FTP and Telnet protocols (Not Secure
Mode).
Exclusive. The equipment manages only the SFTP and SSH protocols (Secure Mode).
SSH Version. Version of the SSH (Secure SHell) protocol managed by the equipment in Secure
Mode:
The active box ( ) indicates that the specific version of the SSH protocol is managed by the
equipment; the inactive box indicates that the version is not managed.
SSH Public Key. Public key algorithm used for the authentication (equipment in Secure Mode):
DSA (only v2). DSA (Digital Signature Algorithm) key cypher algorithm.
Option available only if the equipment manages the version 2 of SSH protocol.
) indicates that the specific key is managed; the inactive box that the it is not
Authentication. Authentication algorithm of the messages managed by the equipment in Secure Mode:
HMAC - SHA1 - 96. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 with 96 bit digest based on hash
code (HMAC).
If the None box is active ( ), no algorithm is managed. The activation of the other boxes indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the it is not managed.
Cipher Algorithm. Symmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode:
3DES - CBC. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based
on the repetition of DES algorithm for three times.
AES 128, 192, 256 (only v2) - CBC. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm with 128 bit key (AES 128), 192 bit key (AES 192) or 256 bit key (AES
259).
Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of the SSH protocol.
If the None box is active ( ), no algorithm is managed. The activation of the other boxes indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the it is not managed.
99
AREA
HTTP Secure Server (HTTPS), Certificate Status, etc. Not meaningful in this context, because the protocol for the management of the WEB pages to open WEB CT is defined at level of
NMS system.
FILE
TRANSFER AREA
Mode. Not meaningful in this context, because the protocol for the transfer of file between NMS
and equipment is defined at level of NMS system.
Push-button
AREA
TRANSFER AREA
Reset FTP Credentials. Not meaningful in this context because the credentials of FTP
user are defined at NMS system level.
Reset SFTP Credentials. Not meaningful in this context because the credentials of SFTP
user are defined at NMS system level.
Push-button present when the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
Set SFTP Credentials. Not meaningful in this context because the credentials of SFTP
user are defined at NMS system level.
Push-button present when the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol.
Current SNMP stack is SNMP-V1/V2... SNMPv1/v2c protocol active.
Current SNMP stack is SNMP-V3... SNMPv3 protocol active.
See also
100
Security (info)
ALCplus2e equipment can operate in Secure Mode, in Not Secure Mode and in mixed mode (Secure Mode/
Not Secure Mode).
First time the equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, the equipment is configured in Not Secure Mode (used protocols: SNMPv1/v2c, FTP and HTTP).
WARNING To create a secure equipment network, it is necessary to configure ALL the pieces of equipment
in the network in Secure Mode.
Secure Mode
Equipment in Secure Mode ensures management sessions protected by the use of the protocol:
SSH for the secure and encrypted access (see SSH protocol (info).
SFTP for the management of the secure data transfer (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).
SNMPv3 for the management of the authenticated and encrypted SNMP messages (see
SNMP protocol (info).
HTTPS for the protected access to WEB CT page (see HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).
To activate this mode, it is necessary to set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Exclusive
and activate the management of the security protocol (see Activate the equipment management
in Secure Mode).
Not Secure Mode
Equipment in this mode does not ensure protected management sessions because it uses protocols which do not ensure the security of the information transmitted on the network: Telnet
and FTP protocols.
To activate this mode, it is necessary to set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Unavailable
and deactivate the management of the security protocols (see Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode.
WARNING In Not Secure Mode, the security protocols SNMPv3 and HTTPS can be activates. Activating them ensures the security only for the functionality relevant to the protocol.
The equipment can operate in mixed mode, managing both the security protocols (SSH/SFTP,
etc.) and the protocols which do not ensure the security (Telnet, FTP).
To activate the mixed mode, it is necessary to set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Available (see Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode))
and activate or deactivate the single security protocols according to ones need.
WARNING It is suggested to use the mixed mode only during the migration of the network equipment from Not Secure Mode to Secure Mode or vice versa.
101
102
103
The equipment can be used for the file transfer (download/upload) the FTP protocol or the SFTP
protocol.
The management of the protocol for the file transfer (FTP or SFTP) between NMS and the equipment is defined at level of NMS system.
104
The versions 1 and 2 of SNMP have the security model based on the community: messages are
passed not-encrypted and can be copied or modified.
SNMPv3
The version 3 of SNMP, instead, foresees a security model based on the user for the protection
of the messages and the control of the access.
In SMNMPv3, every user has his own authentication password and encryption password for the
packets.
In order to authenticate the packets, SNMPv3 utilizes the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA1 algorithm.
The secret key used to calculate the HMAC code is the user password; in order to be authenticated, the packet must contain even the user name besides the HMAC code.
Moreover, the SNMPv3 protocol foresees the possibility to cipher the part of the packet containing the OID of the MIB objects and the relevant values using the cipher algorithm DES56; the
key used for the cipher procedure is different from the key used for HMAC authentication.
This allows defining if allowing the user an access:
For more information, refer to RFC 3410, 3411, 3412, 3413, 3414, 3415, 3584 specifications.
ALCplus2e
The equipment can work with SNMPv1/v2c protocol or with SNMPv3 protocol.
When the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol, only SNMPv1/v2c packets are accepted and
processed.
When the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol, only SNMPv3 packets are accepted and processed. Possible received SNMPv1/v2c packets are discarded.
In order to ensure the security, it is necessary to use SNMPv3 protocol.
WARNING First time equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, equipment uses SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
It is possible to pass from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol and vice versa only via WEB
LCT (see relevant documentation).
105
EQUIPMENT
106
Configurator
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
2XSTM-1 32E1
2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
107
Monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring (info)
1+1 Freq. Div. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of heterofrequential type.
1+1 Hot Standby. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of isofrequential type.
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected configuration and two Ethernet channels.
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and two
Ethernet channels.
The availability of the values changes depending on the IduBoard type as depicted in Tab.5.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
WARNING The radio configuration 1+1 Freq. Div is not supported when the equipment has bandwidth
56MHz.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Xpic activation functionality is not enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of the local program WEB LCT, one
or more features can be enabled.
Tab.4 Radio configuration change
From
Change
1+1 FD
1+1 HS
(2)
1+0
1+1 FD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
1+0
To
1+1 HS (2)
Unequipped
Unequipped
(1)
(1)
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
2x(1+0) SP
(3)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2x(1+0) DP
(4)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes. The Switch configuration is restored to default. All the VLANs are deleted, except for those reserved
(management).
No. The Switch configuration is not changed.
108
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
Radio configuration
Management
1+0
1+1
2x(1+0)
(3)
2x(1+0)
Xpic (4)
STM-1
Nodal
Bus
Matrix
PWE3
IduBoard
IduBoard Xpic
X (5)
X (5)
X (5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(2)
With the PWE3 function active, the matrix is not available (see Tab.12).
109
Absent (Remember Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is not active.
In the case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced Ethernet management, the controller keeps in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.
Absent (Reset Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is not active. In the
case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced Ethernet management, the controller have not kept in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.
1+1 MSP. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP mode).
2 x (1+0) MST. The management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST mode).
1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP mode). For STM-1
with optical interface, the Automatic Laser Shutdown function is permanently disabled.
110
1+0 or 1+1, the parameter is automatically set to 1+0. The value cannot be modified.
Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH
and SDH ring
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment provided with STM-1 (see Tab.5) and if the management
of STM-1 is active.
Tab.5).
When the East-West modality is enabled, the equipment takes the Ring Ethernet modality configuration.
In this modality, the Switch Ethernet must have the following configuration in order to ensure the correct
traffic management:
All the VLAN of the Ring registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
Yes. The management of the East-West modality is active: the radio signal is routed in two different direction named, for accepted custom, East and West.
111
The parameter Tributary B Mapping indicates the mapping of second E1 of base board:
112
Configurator tab
The tab displays the general configuration parameters of the equipment.
The configuration parameters change depending on the type or on the equipped expansion.
Parameters
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected configuration and two Ethernet channels.
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and two Ethernet channels.
The availability of the values changes depending on the IduBoard type as depicted in Tab.5.
Ethernet Enh. Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality:
Absent (Reset Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is not active. In the case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible
with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced
Ethernet management, the controller have not kept in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.
Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms. Monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal
through PDH and SDH ring in input to a SDH ring where the ALCplus2e equipment acts as connection elements:
Parameter not available if the value None is set for STM-1 MST Mode and/or the STM-1 Bulk
function (see STM1 Bulk Config.) is active.
Node Type. Belonging of the equipment to a node:
113
With node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2 and/or
ALCplus2e) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or TDM nodal Bus.
PWE3. Management of PWE3 function:
Parameter available only for equipment that support the PWE3 function (see Tab.5).
Sync Enable. Management of synchronisation:
1+1 MSP. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP modality).
2 x (1+0) MST. The management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST modality).
1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP modality).
For STM-1 with optical interface, the Automatic Laser Shutdown function is permanently disabled.
Parameter available only for equipment provided with STM-1 (see Tab.5).
East-West. Management of the East-West modality:
Yes. The management of the East-West modality is active: the radio signal is routed
in two different direction named, for accepted custom, East and West.
Parameter available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration (see
Tab.5).
See also
The tab displays the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1.
Parameters
114
See also
115
Monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring (info)
The networks with traffic protection of end to end type foresee that the duplication of the path is made on
the whole network, both SDH and PDH.
In these networks, it is then necessary that the Switch in reception is made not only depending on the
quality of the SDH network, but also depending on the quality of the signal incoming in the network itself.
To execute this operation, it is foreseen, in the ALCplus2e equipment, to monitor the 2Mbit/s signal incoming in the SDH network and to report the alarm conditions as alarms of VC12 causing the switching of the
path also in presence of alarms or degradation of the PDH signal (see Verify/modify the monitoring status
of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring).
116
BW & Mod./Link ID
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with the radio.
For the equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is present the BW & Mod./Link ID command. For the
equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration are present the BW & Mod./Link ID 1A (radio branch 1 parameters)
and BW & Mod./Link ID 2A (radio branch 2 parameters) commands.
The BW & Mod./Link ID command manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive
modulation and link identification number.
Operations
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of
the adaptive modulation
Modify the reference band/modulation
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation. These parameters change depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation itself.
ADAPTIVE
MODULATION
ACTIVE
Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled) (Tx Power Ramp)
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
(Upper Modulation/Lower Modulation)
Enable/disable the ACM profile 4QAM Strong (ACM enabled) (Exclude 4QAM Strong)
Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams) (Permanent TDM
Traffic)
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams) (TDM Capacity)
ADAPTIVE
MODULATION INACTIVE
Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams) (Permanent TDM
Traffic)
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams) (TDM Capacity)
Verify/modify the link identification number
Verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1
GUI
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration
parameters of the adaptive modulation
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
117
other branch.
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Bandwidth & Modulation parameter indicates the current reference band/modulation. For each one
of the radio channelling, the modulation and the consequent capacity can be configured.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Upgrade up to... functionality is not enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or
more features can be enabled.
other branch.
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The ACM Engine parameter indicates the operating status of the adaptive modulation.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:
The profile is used only if a modulation equal to the minimum modulation has been selected as reference.
In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done also on the other
branch.
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Tx Power Ramp parameter indicates the power profile of the RF transmitter.
2. To change the parameter, select the value:
Ramp to Ref. Modulation. Mean power constant up to a reference modulation. For the next modulations: power increasing when the modulation decreases.
Ramp to Max. Power. Maximizes the power in every modulation depending on ODU type.
Parameter available only for equipment with ODU ASN version 2.1.0 and higher and ODU AS03 version 1.5.0 and higher.
118
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done also on the other
branch.
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation parameters respectively indicates the upper threshold and
the lower threshold of the modulation.
2. To change the parameters Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation, select the value relevant to the
wished modulation.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
Disabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is available: the profile is present in the ACM Table.
Enabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is not available: the profile is not present in the ACM
Table.
When the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.), the number of permanently allocated E1
is 0. The Permanent TDM Traffic parameter cannot be modified.
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Permanent TDM Traffic parameter indicates the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority
streams).
2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
119
Maximum number of low priority E1 you can assign to the specific profile is pointed out in brackets.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
120
For equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration, the commands BW & Mod./Link ID 1A, which opens the BW &
Mod./Link ID 1A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio 1, and BW & Mod./Link ID
2A, which opens the BW & Mod./Link ID 2A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio
2, are available.
The contextual area displays the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation and link
identification number.
Tabs
Modulation & Capacity tab. Reference band/modulation, operating status and configuration of
the adaptive modulation.
Local Link ID tab. Link identification number.
Extra TDM Priority tab. Priority of the dynamic E1 (TDM Capacity).
Push-button
Bandwidth & Modulation. Channelling - Modulation. For each one of the radio channelling, the
modulation and the consequent capacity can be configured.
Lower Modulation / Upper Modulation. Respectively upper and lower thresholds of the Tx
modulation.
Parameter available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
Exclude 4QAM Strong. Enabling status of the ACM profile 4QAM Strong:
Disabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is available: the profile is present in the ACM
Table.
Enabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is not available: the profile is not present in
the ACM Table.
Ramp to Ref. Modulation. Mean power constant for modulations lower than or equal
to the reference modulation. For higher modulations, power increases when modulation decreases.
Ramp to Max. Power. Maximizes the power in every modulation depending on ODU
type.
Parameter available only for equipment with ODU ASN version 2.1.0 and higher and
ODU AS-03 version 1.5.0 and higher.
121
Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 assigned permanently (high priority streams). These
streams cannot be never discarded by the adaptive modulation. The maximum number of E1
which can be assigned permanently is pointed out next to the box.
Parameter available only for equipment which manage static E1s (see Tab.7).
When the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.) the number of permanently allocated E1 is 0. The parameter cannot be modified.
ACM Table. This table shows, for each ACM level, the number of E1 which can be used.
Depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation, one or more profile will be available. If the adaptive modulation is:
Disabled. The table contains only the ACM profile relevant to the reference modulation
(Bandwidth & Modulation).
Enabled. The table contains all the ACM profiles. Among these, the profile included
between the minimum and the maximum modulation are available.
Profile (ACM Table). 8 profiles ACM are available from 4QAM to 256QAM. An additional profile
on 4QAM with low rate FEC (4QAM Strong) is present too.
Max TDM Cap (ACM Table). Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 which can be assigned to the TDM traffic for every ACM profile.
TDM Capacity (ACM Table). Number of (low priority) E1 assigned to each ACM profile. These
streams will be discarded by adaptive modulation according to the order configured by the user.
Maximum number of low priority E1 you can assign to the specific profile is pointed out in brackets.
Global Capacity (ACM Table). Global capacity associated to the ACM profile.
The value is given by: Ethernet Capacity (including the bandwidth used by PWE3) + TDM High
Priority + TDM Low Priority + Maintenance Channel.
Ethernet Capacity (ACM Table). Capacity dedicated to Ethernet traffic.
WARNING When the contextual area is opened, the values present in the tab refer to the currently selected
reference band/modulation.
If the currently selected reference band/modulation is modified, some parameters are disabled.
In order to display the parameters relevant to the new selected band, it is necessary to confirm (pushbutton Apply) the new reference band/modulation.
See also
122
E1
LIST
The sorting sequence of TDM Capacity, goes from highest priority (first position in the list) to
lowest one (last position in the list).
This means that the E1 at the bottom of the list will be the first stream to be discarded by the
adaptive modulation, the penultimate E1 in the list will be the second to be discarded and so on
until reaching the E1 at the top of the list which will be the last stream to be discarded by the
adaptive modulation.
When an E1 is grey, this means that this stream is available but is not included within the maximum number of TDM Capacity E1 carried by the configured radio frame.
Every Extra E1 Radio channel is represented by the relevant number (121).
For equipment IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0, IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1, IduBoard Xpic
Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0 or IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1 the tab displays the following parameters:
Radio Extra E1. Radio Extra E1 channels.
Tributary. Labels of the E1 tributary. The mapping of the channels is hard-wired:
Radio Extra E1-1 -> Tributary A
Radio Extra E1-2 -> Tributary B
Radio Extra E1-3 -> E1-1 expansion
...
Radio Extra E1-18-> E1-16 expansion
E1 channels of expansion are available only for IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0 and IduBoard Exp.
16E1 Only 1+0/1+1.
Push-button
123
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
2xSTM-1 32E1
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
16E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
16E1 PWE3
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
2xSTM-1 32E1
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
16E1 Only 1+0
16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
16E1 PWE3
124
Push-buttons
Up
Down
1-21
21-1
3-18 1-2
Up
Down
Up
Down
1-18
18-1
3-18 1-2
Ethernet transport
TDM transport
Priority of dynamic E1 Radio streams (TDM Capacity)
Multiple ACM profiles per modulation
Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter
Ethernet transport
ALCplus2e equipment assigns all the capacity not assigned to the TDM transport to the Ethernet interface.
Then, in absence of TDM traffic, the Ethernet capacity coincides with the total available capacity.
TDM transport
The distribution of TDM traffic depends on the equipment type/configuration, as pointed out in Tab.7.
Tab.7 Distribution of TDM traffic
ALCplus2e equipment
Static E1
(Permanent
TDM Traffic)
Dynamic E1
(TDM Capacity)
E1 by
direction
E1 by
polarization
IduBoard Xpic
80
21
82
2x80
2x21
82
2x80
2x18
82
80
82
2x80
2x2
164
82
18
18
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
(2)
(1) (2)
(2)
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
2xSTM-1 32E1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1
16E1 PWE3 (2)
(1) (2)
(2)
(1)
For this equipment type, when the STM-1 Bulk function is active, the number of static E1 is 0. The parameter cannot be modified. The number of dynamic E1s is automatically limited to allow the transport of
the STM-1 (see STM1 Bulk Config.).
125
(2)
With PWE3 function inactive (see Configurator). For this type of equipment, when the PWE3 function is
active, the number static and dynamic E1s is 0.
In ALCplus2e equipment of type IduBoard Only 1+0, IduBoard, IduBoard Xpic, IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only
1+0, IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1, IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0 or IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1
Only 1+0/1+1 the TDM traffic is assigned to every ACM profile selecting the number of E1 which must be
transported.
The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following:
a. For each ACM profile, the value TDM Capacity must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap and
cannot be never greater than 2 or 18 (see Tab.7).
b. When the user sets a value TDM Capacity for an ACM profile, the application automatically
checks and possibly modifies the values TDM Capacity of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in
such a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value TDM Capacity set by the user.
In the remaining types of equipment (see Tab.7) the TDM band can be subdivided in two parts: one not
subjected to ACM, destined to the privileged traffic (high priority) (Permanent TDM Traffic), and one subjected to ACM and destined to the lower priority traffic, (TDM Capacity).
The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following:
a. The number of high priority E1 traffic channels must be lower than or equal to value displayed
next to the Permanent TDM Traffic box.
b. The value of Permanent TDM Traffic fixes the minimum allowed modulation as it blocks all the
modulations for which Max TDM Cap is lower than Permanent TDM Traffic (the application highlights the minimum allowed modulation as consequence of the value Permanent TDM Traffic set
disabling all the not allowed modulations).
c. For each ACM profile, the value TDM Capacity must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap Permanent TDM Traffic and cannot be never greater than 21 or 2 (equipment with XPIC functionality).
d. When the user sets a value TDM Capacity for an ACM profile, the application automatically
checks and possibly modifies the values TDM Capacity of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in
such a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value TDM Capacity set by the user.
e. A change of Permanent TDM Traffic can cause a violation of rule c. In this case, the application
only highlights which are the out-of-range values of Max TDM Cap (the wordings of the row of
the ACM profile become red) and the restore of the correct values is at users charge.
Key:
Max TDM Cap. Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 which can be assigned to the TDM
traffic for each ACM profile.
The user, via the application, can define the priority of dynamic Radio E1s (TDM Capacity).
This priority determines the modality used to discard the dynamic Radio E1s when the ACM profile changes.
126
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected upper modulation
(i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4
QAM).
Reference modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation), upper and lower thresholds of Tx modulation
(Lower Modulation, Upper Modulation) must be set to the same values in both the equipment.
The power profile of RF transmitter of ALCplus2e equipment must be set depending on the profile currently in use (which can differ from that set) in equipment ALCplus2 according to what
pointed out here below.
ALCplus2
Tx Power Mode
ALCplus2e
Tx Power Ramp
Average
Disabled
Peak
127
General Preset
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with the radio.
For the equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is present the General Preset command. For the equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration are present the General Preset 1A (radio branch 1 parameters) and General Preset 2A (radio branch 2 parameters) commands.
The General Preset command manages the modem and radio parameters.
Operations
128
For the 1+1 etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1
and 2) transmit at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception.
1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
The Tx Switch on remote Alarms parameter indicates the enabling of the switch in transmission:
Enable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (BER Alarm, Demodulator Fail
Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is enabled.
Disable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (BER Alarm, Demodulator Fail
Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is not enabled.
For the 1+1 etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1
and 2) transmit at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception.
1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
When the enabling status of the switch in transmission is active (Tx Switch on remote Alarms - Enable),
this switch is executed when the number of alarmed seconds is > N within a time interval T. With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place contemporarily on
both the Rx of the remote equipment.
The box:
Check Period indicates the time interval T (expressed in seconds) when the number of alarmed
seconds must be > N so that the switch in transmission takes place.
2. To change the parameters, type the new values in the relevant boxes (Check Period box: value between
1 and 300; Alarm Thres: value between 1 and 60).
3. Press Apply and confirm.
129
Verify the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
130
7. In the BW Tx Type box, set the criterion used to calculate the band value available within every transmission period (Tx Period):
Average. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the average value of the available
band within the observation period.
Min. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the minimum value of the available band
within the observation period.
Max. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the maximum value of the available band
within the observation period.
131
For equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration, the commands General Preset 1A, which opens the General Preset 1A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio 1, and General Preset 2A, which
opens the General Preset 2A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio 2, are available.
The contextual area displays the modem and radio parameters.
Tabs
General tab
The tab displays the modem and radio parameters.
Parameters
Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the signal at reception.
Radio Branch Label. Label that identifies the radio branch.
Synchronization Setup Protocol. Status of the local/remote synchronization protocol:
If the equipment is in 1+1 isofrequential configuration, the context contains even the following
parameters.
Tx Switch on remote Alarms. Enabling status of the switch in transmission as consequences
of alarms (BER Alarm, Demodulator Fail Alarm) on the signal received from the equipment
located at the other side of the link (remote equipment):
In this condition the switch is executed when the number of alarmed seconds is > N within a
time interval T.
With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place
contemporarily on both the Rx of the remote equipment.
Check Period Time interval T (expressed in seconds) when the number of alarmed seconds
must be > N so that the switch in transmission takes place.
Alarm Thres Number of alarmed seconds N.
Push-button
132
See also
MCM tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the MCM (MW Capacity Management) function.
Parameters
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 (MCM Enable area). Respectively enabling status of the MCM function for the LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4.
The active box ( ) indicates that the BW-VSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive
box indicates that the messages are not managed.
TX VLan ID. Tag 802.1Q VLAN value. By default, the BW-VSM message is sent untagged (value
0).
TX OAM Maint. Level. Maintenance Level of the OAM domain. By default, the BW-VSM message is associated with Maintenance Level 0.
Fading Hold Off (s). Waiting period (in seconds) before declaring Fading and starting the
transmission of BW-VSM messages Default 10 seconds.
TX Period (s). Transmission period (in seconds) between one BW-VSM message and the next
one. Default 10 seconds.
BW Tx Type. Criterion used to calculate the band value available within every transmission period (Tx Period):
Average. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the average value of the
available band within the observation period.
Min. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the minimum value of the available band within the observation period.
Max. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the maximum value of the
available band within the observation period.
Default Average.
See also
133
The local/remote synchronization protocol, when active, besides the management of the change of the radio parameters, allows managing the radio configuration of the equipment in the link when the alarm RADIO Link Telemetry Fail is present.
This alarm, if it is the only radio alarm active, indicates a mismatch on the band repartition between the
two pieces of equipment.
In this condition, the modality called Rescue setup is automatically activated, which forces both the equipment to the following condition:
The activation of the Rescue setup modality is pointed out by the activation of the alarm RADIO Rescue
Setup Active.
The alarm is removed when the operator realigns the radio parameters in both the equipment of the link.
The synchronization protocol can be enabled and disabled by the user (see Verify/modify the status of the
local/remote synchronization protocol).
By default, the protocol is enabled.
If the user disables it, it remains disabled until the user re-enables it.
In equipment in 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration, enabling/disabling executed on a branch
is automatically reported even on the other branch.
The local/remote synchronization is implemented by a proprietary protocol. It is meaningful and available
for the radio equipment of type ALCplus2e, ALCplus2 or ALplus2.
134
Tag 802.1Q VLAN value (TX VLan ID parameter). By default, the BW-VSM message is
sent untagged (value 0).
Maintenance Level of the OAM domain (TX OAM Maint. Level parameter). By default, the
BW-VSM message is associated with Maintenance Level 0.
This setting involves the change of the destination MAC address of the BW-VSM message
because this address corresponds to the CCM multicast address for the associated OAM
maintenance level.
Waiting period (in seconds) before declaring Fading and starting the transmission of the
BW-VSM messages (Fading Hold Off (s) parameter). The default waiting period is 10 seconds.
Transmission period between one BW-VSM message and the next one (TX Period (s) parameter). The default waiting period is 10 seconds.
Criterion used to calculate the band value available within every transmission period (Tx
Period): average, minimum or maximum value (BW Tx Type parameter). By default, the
BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the average value of the band available during the observation period (Average).
See also
Verify the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function
Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN
Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM)
135
Xpic
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration.
3. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.
136
137
The contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the XPIC function.
Parameters
When XPIC fault management procedure is active, the detection of a fault on a branch and the consequent action automatically executed by FMP procedure to save the other branch are pointed out
by the faults present in the Fault Management Procedure area.
If a box becomes red, orange, yellow, light blue or green (depending on the severity of the relevant
to the relevant alarm), the box:
Remote Xpic Proc. Radio 1A Tx Off, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault
on receiver of branch 1 of remote terminal, FMP procedure has switched off the transmitter of
branch 1 of local terminal.
Xpic Proc. Block on Radio 1A, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault on
receiver of branch 2 of remote terminal or on receiver of branch 2 of local terminal, FMP procedure has forced the disabling of XPIC function of branch 1 of local terminal.
Remote Xpic Proc. Radio 2A Tx Off, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault
on receiver of branch 2 of remote terminal, FMP procedure has switched off the transmitter of
branch 2 of local terminal.
Xpic Proc. Block on Radio 2A, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault on
receiver of branch 1 of remote terminal or on receiver of branch 1 of local terminal, FMP procedure has forced the disabling of XPIC function of branch 2 of local terminal.
When the box is grey, this means that the specific fault has not been detected.
Push-button
138
To disable temporarily the function XPIC for every single branch (Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch) and then to re-enable it (Restore the XPIC function of the single
branch).
Disabling the function XPIC is a manual operation (MAN. OP). Remember that, if the timeout of
the manual operations is inactive, the function XPIC remains disabled until when it is restored
by the user.
To enable and disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) (see Enable/disable XPIC fault
management procedure (FMP).
In case of detection and signalling of a fault, the function XPIC can be restored (see Restore the
function XPIC after a fault detection).
Purpose of the FMP (Fault Management Procedure) procedure is to identify a malfunction caused
by equipment faults and by equipment faults and to preserve the horizontal or vertical branch
where there are not problems
The procedure differentiates the alarms due to external causes (e.g., fading) from those due to
equipment faults.
The activation of the FMP procedure involves the switch-off of a transmitter and the disabling of
the Xpic inputs.
The condition is permanent and only an operator by means of WEB LCT or NMS5UX-B/
NMS5LX can restore the condition.
139
STM-1 Bulk
function (info).
1. Select Equipment > STM1 Bulk Config.
The Radio 1A and Radio 2A parameters respectively point out the status of the STM-1 Bulk function of
the radio branch 1 and radio branch 2:
The Radio 2A parameter is available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
2. To change a parameter, select the relevant box and then the wished option.
If a value is set for the Radio 1A parameter this value will not be available for the Radio 2A parameter
and vice versa.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
140
Radio 1A. Enabling status of the STM-1 Bulk function for radio branch 1:
Radio 2A. Enabling status of the STM-1 Bulk function for radio branch 2:
141
The STM-1 Bulk function can be activated only if the equipment has the following configuration:
Band/modulation which allows the transport of the STM-1 (see Modulation & Capacity tab).
ACM disable:
28MHz - 256 QAM
ACM enable:
40MHz - 64 QAM
40MHz - 128 QAM
40MHz - 256 QAM
56MHz - 16 QAM
56MHz - 32 QAM
56MHz - 64 QAM
56MHz - 128 QAM
56MHz - 256 QAM
STM-1 in MST modality (see Configurator tab, STM-1 MST Mode: 1+0).
For the STM-1 for which the function has been activated, the following items will be not available
any more:
The relevant PM measure (G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2TUG12>).
The command for the management of the relevant VC-4 (see VC-4).
The command for the management of the relevant VC-12 (see VC-12).
The management of the stream in the Cross-Connection matrix (see Cross Connection).
142
Force the quality level in input and/or output of the specific synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
For the radio which the transport of the STM-1 is assigned to:
The static Radio E1 channels (Permanent TDM Traffic) are automatically reset.
The dynamic Radio E1 channels are limited to allow the transport of the STM-1.
If the equipment is in radio configuration 2x(1+0), for the parameter STM-1 MST Mode only the
values 1+0 and 2 x (1+0) MST are available (see Configurator).
The monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring, if active, is automatically deactivated (see Configurator).
SYNCHRONISATION
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the synchronisation management is enabled (see Configurator).
The Synchronisation command manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism
Operations
T0
AND
T4
SYNCHRONISM
SOURCES
Synchronisation (info)
1. Select Synchronisation.
The General tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 and T4 synchronism.
143
1. Select Synchronisation.
The Status Control parameter indicates the status of T0 synchronism:
Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).
1. Select Synchronisation.
The T0-T4 parameter indicates the modality which the T4 synchronism is taken from:
T4-NE-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from one of the synchronism sources because two independent locking devices are used to generate T0 and T4.
T4-EQ-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from synchronism T0 because only one locking device is
used to generate T0 and T4.
1. Select Synchronisation.
The T4 Squelch parameter indicates the status of the T4 squelch:
Enabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is enabled. This function becomes active when
source T2/T3 1 has been selected for T0/T4 management.
1. Select Synchronisation.
144
The Hold Off Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the
evaluated frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded).
At the end of the Hold Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input
source having a valid signal.
2. To change the parameter, set into the box a value between 300 and 1800 msec.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
1. Select Synchronisation.
The WTR Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to
allow to the selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 12 min.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
1. Select Synchronisation.
The LTI Set Time and LTI Reset Time parameters point out the threshold level of LTI alarm (Timing
Synk Loss Alarm):
LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the presence
of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.
LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the
presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.
2. To change the parameter, set the new values in the specific boxes (allowed interval between 0 and 60
seconds).
3. Press Apply and confirm.
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the
synchronism
Access | Read & Write
1. Select Synchronisation.
The parameter Enabled indicates the status of use of the source quality level as synchronism selection
criterion.
Active box (
) means the use is enabled; inactive box means the use is disabled.
145
Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism,
is enabled.
1. Select Synchronisation.
The T4 Minimum Quality indicates the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism so that the Squelch does not occur.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:
PRC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.
SSUT. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
1. Select Synchronisation.
Depending on the used locking devices, the tabs T0/T4, T0 and T4 are available.
Tab T0/T4 is available when only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4
(T4-EQ-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the tab is valid for
both synchronisms T0 and T4.
Tab T0 and tab T4 are available when two locking devices are used to generate the synchronisms T0
and T4 (T4-NE-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the tab T0
is valid only for synchronism T0; while those present in tab T4 are valid only for synchronism T4.
The content of T0/T4, T0 and T4 tab, described here below, is the same.
1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:
T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.
T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.
146
To disable the use of the source, select the specific Priority box and then the Dis. value.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.
1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:
T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.
T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.
T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.
T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.
Off, not to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.
On, to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.
147
The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.
1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:
T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.
T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.
Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism
sources.
On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for the generation
of the synchronism.
1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:
T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.
T0 e T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. Even in this case the operation
is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and synchronism T4 because the selection of the
source type is made upstream with respect to locking devices. This means that the setting made,
for example, in tab T0 is automatically reported in tab T4 and vice versa.
3. To change the parameter, select the Source box and then the wished option.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.
148
Set the signal used as synchronism source for TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input
Access | Read & Write
1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:
T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.
T0 e T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. Even in this case the operation
is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and synchronism T4 because the selection of the
source type is made upstream with respect to locking devices. This means that the setting made,
for example, in tab T0 is automatically reported in tab T4 and vice versa.
1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:
T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.
T0 e T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. Even in this case the operation
is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and synchronism T4 because the selection of the
source type is made upstream with respect to locking devices. This means that the setting made,
for example, in tab T0 is automatically reported in tab T4 and vice versa.
3. To change the parameter, select the Source box and then the wished option.
The availability of the values changes depending on the type and on the configuration of the equipment
as depicted in Tab.8.
If a value is set for the source STM-1/NODAL A, this value will not be available for the source STM-1/
NODAL B and vice versa.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
149
Operation not available for the STM-1 source if the STM-1 Bulk function is active for the specific stream
(see STM1 Bulk Config.).
1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:
T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.
T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.
none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken from the
SSM protocol or, for the sources that do not use the SSM protocol (T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2 sources), the default one (SEC).
PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.
SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:
T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.
T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.
150
3. Select the source, with valid signal, whose availability you wish to restore for the generation of T0 synchronism.
4. Press Wtr Clear and confirm.
The source is immediately used for the generation of T0 synchronism. The period Wtr Time is considered elapsed.
Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of tributary A/B
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING The setting of the tributary (A or B) as output of synchronism T12 compromises the use of the
T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC). The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic only or for
the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see Re-timing the E1s set
for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation).
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for
the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.
T3 (2Mb/s). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2Mbit/s.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for
the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.
T3 (2MHz). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2MHz.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2MHz as interface for the
tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.
Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Here below only the operation of re-timing of the E1s of equipment is described. For the correct
configuration of the functionality for a radio link see Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation.
1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the E1 Retiming tab.
The table present in the tab displays the activation status of the function E1 re-timing for every E1
equipment tributary.
Every row of the table corresponds to a tributary for which is displayed in the column:
E1 <number>. E1 of expansion.
151
Sync Alarm. Sync Alarm status. The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, indicates whether the operation failed (alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated).
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical,
Major, Minor, Warning severity.
3. To change status of E1 re-timing function of a tributary, select the specific E1 Retiming box and then
the wished option.
Pressing Revert changes cancels the change executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only:
If the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.
1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the T2/T3 E1 SA Bit/1000Base-T Role tab.
In the E1 Time Slot 0 Spare Bits area, the T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2 boxes respectively point out the spare
bit of timeslot 0 of the E1 frame used for the coding of the quality level of the sources T2/T3 1 and T2/
T3 2: Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8.
3. To change the parameters, select the T2/T3 1 or T2/T3 2 box and then the Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8
option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used
as synchronism sources
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation meaningful only:
If the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.
For LANs with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active and the active configuration is 1000Base-T.
1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the T2/T3 E1 SA Bit/1000Base-T Role tab.
In the 1000Base-T Role area, the boxes TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B respectively point out the modality
used to assign the role (Master or Slave) of the LANs set for the synchronism sources TE LAN-A and TE
LAN-B:
According to synch direction. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is
automatically managed by SSM protocol independently from the port parameter.
As set up for source LAN. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is defined at level of LAN (see Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for
the LAN).
152
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Sync eth support functionality is not enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or
more features can be enabled.
nism, is enabled.
1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the LAN SSM Enabling tab.
The parameters LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4 respectively point out the enabling status of the management of the SSM messages for the LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4.
The active box ( ) indicates that the SSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive box indicates that the messages are not managed.
3. To change a parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
153
Synchronisation (info)
General tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 and T4 synchronism.
Parameters
Alarms area. Alarms status of the T0 synchronism (Free Running, Hold Over and T0 boxes) and
T4 synchronism (T4 box). The colour of each box displays the status of the specific alarm:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
Enabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is enabled. This function becomes active
when source T2/T3 1 has been selected for T0/T4 management.
T4-NE-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from one of the synchronism sources because two
independent locking devices are used to generate T0 and T4.
Hold Off Time (area Time). Time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded). At the end of the Hold
Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input source having a
valid signal.
154
WTR Time (area Time). Time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to allow to
the selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism.
LTI Set Time / LTI Reset Time (area Time). Threshold level of LTI alarm (TimingSynkLossAlarm):
LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the
presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.
LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.
PRC. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.
SSUT. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
Generally, the quality of the T0 synchronism corresponds to the quality of the synchronism
which T0 is derived from.
T4 Current (area Quality). Current quality level of the T4 synchronism.
PRC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.
SSUT. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization (equivalent to condition
of T4 squelch).
Enabled (Quality area). Status of use of source quality level as synchronism selection criterion.
Active box ( ) means the source quality level is used as synchronism selection criterion; inactive box means the quality level is used as selection criterion.
T4 Minimum Quality (area Quality). Minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4
synchronism so that the Squelch does not occur:
PRC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.
SSUT. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
WARNING The T0 Current, T4 Current and T4 Minimum Quality parameters are meaningful only if the use
of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.
Quality area is available only if the Sync quality management functionality is enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or more
features can be enabled.
See also
155
T0/T4. Tab available when only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0
and T4 (T4-EQ-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the
tab is valid for both synchronisms T0 and T4.
T0 and T4. Tabs available when two locking devices are used to generate the synchronisms T0
and T4 (T4-NE-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the
tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0; while those present in tab T4 are valid only for synchronism T4.
The content of tabs T0/T4, T0 and T4 is the same.
The table present in the specific tab displays the sources for the synchronism T0 and/or T4. Every
row corresponds to one source.
Parameters
T2/T3 1 [Interface]. Source extracted from the tributary A. The interface is pointed
out between square brackets. It can be T3 or T2.
T2/T3-2 [Interface]. Source extracted from tributary B or from one of the E1 of the
expansion. The interface is pointed out between square brackets. It can be T3 (tributary B only) or T2.
STM-1/NODAL A. First source extracted from the STM-1 (1 or 2) or from the Nodal
Bus (1 or 2).
STM-1/NODAL B. Second source extracted from the STM-1 (1 or 2) or from the Nodal
Bus (1 or 2).
STM-1 [1] or STM-1. Source extracted from the first STM-1 tributary.
Internal. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (12,8MHz STRATUM 3).
This source is valid only for synchronism T0, so it will be present only in tabs T0/T4
or T0. The Internal source has not configuration parameters.
The detail of the signal/configuration relevant to every single s source and the availability of the
source depending on the type/configuration of the equipment is pointed out in Tab.8.
TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B sources are available only if the Sync eth support functionality is enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one
or more features can be enabled.
156
LAN-1, LAN-2, LAN-3, LAN-4. Respectively first, second, third and fourth LAN of the
Ethernet Switch. LAN 3 and LAN 4 are available when configured both with electrical
and optical interface.
<1 9>. The synchronism source is enabled and has a priority level pointed out by
the number (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).
Off. The source has not been manually forced for the generation of the T0 and/or T4
synchronism.
On <light blue box>. The source has been manually forced for the generation of the
T0 and/or T4 synchronism (Manual Operation).
Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources.
On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used
for the generation of the synchronism.
Sync Loss / Sync Drift. Respectively status of the alarm Timing Synk Loss Alarm and Timing
Synk Drift Alarm relevant to the source. The colour of each box displays the status of the specific
alarm:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the primary reference clock.
SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the equipment clock.
The quality level in reception for STM-1 is in compliance with the SSM protocol, while for E1
(2Mbit/s and 2MHz) it is SEC.
Tx Quality. Quality level in transmission of the source.
The quality level in transmission of the synchronism source in input is the result of the protocol
calculation.
The displayed values are the same described for the Rx Quality parameter.
The transmission quality level for STM-1 when the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk
Config.) is UNK.
Ovw Rx Qlty. Forcing status of the quality level in reception of the source:
PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the primary reference clock.
157
SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the equipment clock.
none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken
from the SSM protocol or, for the sources that do not use the SSM protocol (T2/T3 1
and T2/T3 2 sources), the default one (SEC).
Ovw Tx Qlty. Forcing status of the quality level in transmission of the source.
The displayed values are the same described for the Ovw Rx Qlty parameter.
The Rx Quality, Tx Quality, Ovw Rx Qlty and Ovw Tx Qlty parameters are present only if the use of
the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.
The source of synchronism whose row has red border indicates the source which the equipment extracts the synchronization T0 and/or T4 from.
When the source, which the synchronization is extracted from, changes, the row relevant to the new
source will become yellow and will blink before becoming of color sky-blue with red border.
Push-button
T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC). The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic
only or for the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see
pag.213To re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation).
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.
158
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.
WARNING The setting of the tributary (A or B) as output of synchronism T12 compromises the use of the
Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of
tributary A/B
E1 Retiming tab
The tab displays the parameters to re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation.
Parameters
E1 <number>. E1 of expansion.
Sync Alarm. Sync Alarm status. The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, indicates whether the operation failed (alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated).
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
Push-button
Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
159
Parameters
T2/T3 1, T2/T3 2 (E1 Time Slot 0 Spare Bits area). Respectively spare bit of timeslot 0 of E1
frame used for the coding of the quality level of the source T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2: Sa4, Sa5, Sa6,
Sa7 or Sa8.
TE LAN-A, TE LAN-B (1000Base-T Role area). Respectively modality to assign the role (Master
or Slave) of the LANs (1000Base-T) set for the synchronism sources TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B:
According to synch direction. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is automatically managed by SSM protocol independently from the setting
of the port parameters.
As set up for source LAN. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is defined at level of LAN (see Verify/modify the operating modality of the line
synchronism (role) for the LAN).
See also
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as synchronism
sources
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4. Respectively enabling status of the management of the SSM
messages for the LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4.
The active box ( ) indicates that the SSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive box
indicates that the messages are not managed.
See also
160
Synchronisation (info)
Management of synchronisation
Synchronism sources
Enabling of the synchronism sources
Configuration of the synchronism sources
Priority of the synchronism source
Quality of synchronism source
Forcing of a synchronism source
Function of preferential synchronism source
Internal synchronism T0
Synchronism in output T4
Synchronism in output T12
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
Management of synchronisation
ALCplus2e equipment can be configured to operate with synchronisation enabled or disabled.
When the synchronisation is disable, the synchronisation is not managed: the clocks are generated by the
local internal reference.
When the synchronisation is enabled, the synchronism source, enabled with the highest priority, is used
to synchronise the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential is not active).
If the quality is active as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, the enabled source with highest
quality is used to synchronize the equipment (if no forcing is active).
The user can enable or disable the management of synchronisation as he wishes (see Configurator) and
enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism.
The equipment makes a synchronization signal available to other equipment (synchronism T4), common
or independent from the synchronism used by the equipment (synchronism T0).
Access to T4 synchronism is possible through a special setting of the outputs of tributaries A and/or B (T12
synchronism).
Synchronism sources
The equipment has more synchronism sources.
The number/type of synchronism sources depends on the type/expansion/configuration of equipment as
depicted in Tab.8.
Tab.8 Synchronism sources
IDUBOARD ONLY 1+0
Name
Type
Configuration
T2/T3 1
E1
(1)
T2/T3 2
E1
(1)
TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
Radio
RADIO 1A
161
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD XPIC
Name
Type
Configuration
T2/T3 1
E1
(1)
T2/T3 2
E1
(1)
TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
RADIO 1A
Radio
RADIO 2A
Radio
Type
Configuration
(1)
T2/T3 1
E1
T2/T3 2
E1
TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
STM-1 (4)
STM-1
STM-1.
Source available only if the management of STM-1 is enabled
RADIO 1A
Radio
Configuration
(1)
T2/T3 1
E1
T2/T3 2
E1
TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
STM-1
STM-1.
Source available only if the management of STM-1 is enabled
RADIO 1A
Radio
RADIO 2A
Radio
STM-1
162
Type
(4)
Type
Configuration
(1)
T2/T3 1
E1
T2/T3 2
E1
TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
Radio
RADIO 1A
The name and the configuration of the sources in input for the STM-1 and for the Nodal Bus change depending on the configuration of the equipment and are pointed out in Tab.9
Type
Configuration
(1)
T2/T3 1
E1
T2/T3 2
E1
TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
RADIO 1A
Radio
RADIO 2A
Radio
The name and the configuration of the sources in input for the STM-1 and for the Nodal Bus change depending on the configuration of the equipment and are pointed out in Tab.9
Type
Configuration
(1)
T2/T3 1
E1
T2/T3 2
E1
TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
Radio
RADIO 1A
163
Type
Configuration
(1)
T2/T3 1
E1
T2/T3 2
E1
TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
RADIO 1A
Radio
RADIO 2A
Radio
(1)
The type of interface depends on the setting made by the user for the management of the synchronism
in output T12 (see Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/
input) of tributary A/B).
(2)
LAN 1
LAN 2
If a value is set for the source TE LAN-A this value will not be available for the source TE LAN-B and
vice versa.
Source available only if the Sync eth support functionality is enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or
more features can be enabled.
(3)
Source not available for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration with East-West option
disable.
(4) If the management of two STM-1 is active, the values STM-1 [1] and STM-1 [2] will be available, which
respectively point out the source relative to the first STM-1 and second STM-1.
164
Name
Type
Configuration
Disable
Enable
1 STM-1
Enable
2 STM-1
Disable
Enable
Nodal 1
Nodal Bus
Nodal Bus 1
Nodal 2
Nodal Bus
Nodal Bus 2
STM-1
STM-1
First STM-1
STM-1/
NODAL A
STM-1 or
Nodal Bus
STM-1/
NODAL B
STM-1 or
Nodal Bus
STM-1 [1]
STM-1
First STM-1
STM-1 [2]
STM-1
Second STM-1
STM-1/
NODAL A
STM-1 or
Nodal Bus
STM-1/
NODAL B
STM-1 or
Nodal Bus
(1)
If a value is set for the source STM-1/NODAL A this value will not be available for the source STM-1/
NODAL B and vice versa.
165
When the quality is not active as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, the source with the highest
priority level and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential
source is not active).
The priority level of the synchronism source is pointed out by a number between 1 and 9, where 1 indicates
the highest priority and 9 the lowest one.
Generally the equipment takes the synchronism from the source with the highest priority level: if this
source is missing or is degraded, the synchronism is taken from the source with priority level immediately
lower.
When the source with highest priority level returns to be valid, the equipment after the WTR time will automatically start to use it to take the synchronism. If all the synchronism sources (set by the user) become
unavailable, the equipment automatically takes the synchronism from its own internal reference.
The degradation of the signal is caused by the presence of, at least, one of the following conditions:
The difference between the source frequency and the internal reference source (STRATUM 3) is
greater than 7 ppm.
If two or more sources with the same priority are activated, these sources will be inserted into a circular
and not Revertive list.
PRC (Primary Reference Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the primary reference
clock.
SSUT (Synchronisation Supply Unit Transit). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITUT G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the
transit synchronism units.
SSUL (Synchronisation Supply Unit Local). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T
G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the synchronism local units.
SEC (SDH Equipment Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
Depending on the type of synchronism source, the modality used to insert and extract the SSM messages
changes as pointed out here below.
166
Synchronism
sources
T2/T3 1
Configuration
Tributary A
T2/T3 2
Tributary B
Output of
synchronism T12
E1 re-timing
function
T2
(NORMAL TRAFFIC)
Enable
Disable
(2)
T3 (2Mb/s)
T3 (2MHz)
T2
(NORMAL TRAFFIC)
(2)
Enable
Disable
T3 (2MHz)
(2)
Enable
Disable
(1)
(2)
Value UNK.
(2)
T3 (2Mb/s)
Tributary E1
expansion
(2)
(1)
SSM messages
management
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
(1)
LAN connected to the TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input (see Set the signal used as synchronism source for
TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input).
As regards the quality management via the WEB CT page, it is possible:
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism
Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism.
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as synchronism sources
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN
WARNING The quality of the synchronism sources is a feature subjected to enabling (Sync quality management equipment feature).
If this feature is not enabled, all the parameters relevant to the quality management will not be available.
By means of local program WEB LCT, one or more features can be enabled.
167
Internal synchronism T0
The synchronism source, which the internal synchronism T0 is extracted from, is determined by the SETS
of the equipment according to the following order of criteria:
Preferential source
Source priority
Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).
The user can force the status of the internal synchronism T0 (see Force the status of the T0 synchronisation).
The forcing of the status Hold Over or Free Running is not the normal operation of the synchronism T0.
These forcings are maintenance operations and remain active until when the user does not disable them
or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).
Synchronism in output T4
The equipment makes a synchronization signal available to other equipment (synchronism T4), common
or independent from the synchronism used by the equipment (synchronism T0) (see Set the modality from
which the T4 synchronism is extracted).
This because the synchronization unit is composed by two independent locking devices (Phase Locked
Loop):
168
The selection of the references which the devices are locked to can be independent (T4T0) or associated
(T4=T0) to the use of a single device.
For every device, as told before, a set of sources can be set which, depending on their priority, are selected
to generate the equipment synchronisation.
Output of Synchronism
T12 on tributary A
Yes
(1)
Interface of tributary A
(output/input)
Use of tributary A
as traffic tributary
2Mbit/s
Yes
T3 (2Mb/s)
Yes
2Mbit/s
No
T3 (2MHz)
Yes
2MHz
No
Output of Synchronism
T12 on tributary B
Interface of tributary B
(output/input)
Use of tributary B
as traffic tributary
2Mbit/s
Yes
Yes
(1)
T3 (2Mb/s)
Yes
2Mbit/s
No
T3 (2MHz)
Yes
2MHz
No
(1)
For the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic (see Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation).
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
The function called Re-timing of E1s allows re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic
and synchronisation, to increase the requirements of jitter and wander even in case of operation with adaptive modulation (ACM).
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the base board (tributary A and B)
The tributaries of the base board can be set for the transport only of the traffic or as output of T12 synchronism.
If the user wishes to use the tributary A or B for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation,
in any condition of operation of the radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations
described in the following example.
Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary A used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.3).
169
REMOTE equipment
SETS
management
SETS
management
Tributary A
Tributary A
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the expansion (tributary 1...n)
Generally the tributaries of the expansion transport traffic.
If the user wants to use their frequency for synchronisation purposes in any condition of operation of the
radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations described in the following example.
Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary 1 used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.4).
Fig.4 Example of re-timing of tributary 1 (synchronisation)
LOCAL equipment
REMOTE equipment
SETS
management
SETS
management
Tributary 1
170
Tributary 1
171
BASE BAND
172
Ethernet Switch
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
GENERAL
SETTINGS OF THE
ETHERNET SWITCH
OF
PTOS/DSCP
FIELD
Verify/assign the output queue to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3)
VIRTUAL LAN
Verify the existing virtual LANs
Create a virtual Lan
Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan
Delete a virtual Lan
GUI
173
Disable. Learning of MAC Address in MAC Table is never partitioned in presence of VLAN 802.1Q
registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
Enable. The partition and the indicization on VID basis of MAC Addresses in MAC Table are enabled. Their learning is registered in a segment of MAC Table whose index is the value of VID
contained in the VLANs entering the Switch and registered in VTU.
Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
2. Press Show Mac Table.
The MAC Table window shows the content of the MAC Table at the moment when the window has been
opened. Press Refresh to update the list.
Every row of the table corresponds to one address with the indication of:
174
FID. Number of the MAC Table partition which the address is associated to.
The availability of the Radio ports depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.11).
TTL. Priority in the deletion of the packet from the MAC Table:
Unicast aging. Dynamic Unicast address (removed from MAC Table at the expiry of Aging
Time).
Unicast static. Static Unicast address (not removed from MAC Table at the expiry of Aging
Time).
---. Packets with protocol or use different from those listed above.
175
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
Strict Priority, the queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.
8421 WRR, a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a part of the
queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2
messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from
the queue with highest priority.
Strict 3, the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other
queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
Strict 3 and 2, the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The other queues
(1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.
Verify/assign the output queue to a packet according to its Tag 802.1p (level 2)
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
Verify/assign the output queue to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3)
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING The setting of the parameter is common to all the Ethernet ports of the equipment.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the level-3 priority (analysis of field PTOS/DSCP) is not
managed when the transit of the packets takes place through the nodal interconnection.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch.
176
Disable, not to enable the port for the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan.
Tagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information:
Of priority; the value is defined in the Default Priority box of the origin port of the packet
itself.
Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the origin port
of the packet.
177
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID of the input
port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not satisfied, the Vlan Table
is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.
Untag., to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in
output from the port.
Unmodif., to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or added to the packets in
output from the port.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.11).
In order to create the VLAN, the transit of the packets must be enabled at least for one port (a value
different from Disable is set).
8. Press Apply and confirm.
The Virtual Lan Config. tab displays the row relevant to the new virtual Lan.
If the displayed message is:
Warning! VLAN ID already in the list. The set identifier corresponds to that of an already existing
VLAN. Change the value in the VLan ID box.
Warning! VLAN ID already reserved in port configuration In Band Management.The set identifier corresponds to that reserved for the in-band supervision for one or more elements. Change
the value in the VLan ID box.
An OAM MA and/or a MEP are bound on this VLAN. Please remove them before modifying it. To
the VLAN is associated at least a MA and/or a MEP of the OAM-FM Domain defined for the equipment. Before changing the VLAN is necessary to dismiss all the relevant MA/MEP (see OAM).
178
General tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Ethernet Switch.
Parameters
QinQ ETH type 0x. Eth Type value in the S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ field.
Max Packet size (Byte). Maximum size of the accepted packet:
MAC Learning Vid basis. Address learning modality of MAC address in the relevant table:
Disable. The learning of MAC Address in MAC Table is never partitioned in presence
of VLAN 802.1Q registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
Enable. The partition and the indicization on VID (VLAN Identifier) basis of MAC Addresses in MAC Table are enabled. Their learning is registered in a segment of MAC
Table whose index is the value of VID contained in the VLANs entering the Switch and
registered in VTU.
MAC Addr. Aging Time. Validity period of the MAC addresses, stored in the MAC Table.
Egress Priority Policy. Emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue:
8421 WRR, indicates that a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is
empties, then a part of the queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the
queue with further lower priority (2 messages), then a part of the queue with lowest
priority (1 message) and so on restarting from the queue with highest priority.
Strict Priority, indicates that the queue with highest priority is completely emptied
(sending of all the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.
Strict 3, indicates that the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all
the messages). The other queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
Strict 3 and 2, indicates that the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely
emptied. The other queues (1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.
802.1p Priority Management. The table indicates which output queue a packet, in input to
any Ethernet port, must be assigned to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag:
Queue... Output queue available in the equipment. Each Ethernet port of the equipment has four output queue, which the packets in input from other ports are sent to:
179
The active option indicates the combination output queue - Tag 802.1p.
The table is common to all the Ethernet port of the equipment.
Push-button
LLF tab
The tab displays the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Parameters
LLF Hysteresis. Time interval (hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality is activated and deactivated.
See also
View Queue 0. The table displays only the values associated to the 0 output queue.
View Queue 1. The table displays only the values associated to the 1 output queue.
View Queue 2. The table displays only the values associated to the 2 output queue.
View Queue 3. The table displays only the values associated to the 3 output queue.
Filter. Set the IP format which the DSCP field refers to:
IP v4 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the
IPv4 format.
IP v6 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the
IPv6 format.
Table. Every row of the table corresponds to a possible value for the relevant PTOS/DSCP field:
180
Precedence, Delay, Throug., Reliab., DSCP. For the description of the options see RFC
2474, 2597 and 2598 specifications.
Internal Priority (Queue). Queue which the packet in input to the specific port, whose
PTOS/DSCP has the value displayed in the row, is assigned to is displayed:
See also
Verify/assign the output queue to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3)
VLan ID. Identifier assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation.
The VLans automatically created by the system (reserved VLans) are indicated as follows:
<identifier> Used. VLAN that use as ID, the default VLan ID of any Ethernet (see Default VLan ID area).
<identifier> res. (management). VLan reserved for the in-band supervision (see
Ethernet tab).
<identifier> res. (g8032). VLan associated to one ERP instance (see Ring Protection).
Label. Name assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation or modification.
Parameter not available for the reserved VLan (res...).
Lan1. Enabling of the LAN 1 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN:
Disable. The port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to
that of the virtual Lan.
Untag. The port allows the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed
to the packets in output from the port.
Tagged. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information:
Of priority; the value is defined in the Default Priority box of the origin port of
the packet itself.
Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the
origin port of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID
of the input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not
satisfied, the Vlan Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.
Unmodif. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or
added to the packets in output from the port.
Lan2. Enabling of the LAN 2 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
Lan3. Enabling of the LAN 3 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
Lan4. Enabling of the LAN 4 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
181
PortA. Enabling of the Radio port A to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
PortB. Enabling of the Radio port B to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment radio configuration (see
Tab.11).
Default VLan ID. Default VLan identifier of each Ethernet port of the equipment.
Push-button
182
Default Vid of the port in input which the untagged packet comes from.
Default Pbit of the port in input which the untagged packet comes from.
Ingress Filtering Check of the ports in input and in output is configured to Fallback or Secure.
In VLAN Table, a VLAN is configured equal to the parameter Default Vid of the port in input (value of VID which will be written), defined as unmodified for the port in input and tagged for the
port in output
Default Vid of the input port which the packet comes from
Default Pbit of the input port which the packet comes from, if 802.1p is disabled
Origin Pbit (possibly re-mapped) of the packet in input if 802.1p is enabled (or remapping is
enable)
Ingress Filtering Check of input and output ports is configured to Fallback or Secure.
Field Frame Egress Mode in the output port is configured as Add Double Tag.
In VLAN Table, is configured a VLAN equal to the parameter Default Vid of the port in input,
defined as unmodified for the input port and unmodified for the port in output
Ethernet Type defined in Ethernet Switch QinQ Eth type (default 0x9100)
Default Vid of the input port which the packet comes from.
Default Pbit of the input port which the packet comes from, if 802.1p is disabled
183
Origin Pbit (possibly re-mapped) of the packet in input if 802.1p is enabled (or remapping is
enable)
A port configured as Add Double Tag removes, in input, all the S-Tag with Ethernet type corresponding to that configured in Ethernet Switch QinQ Eth type (default 0x9100)
Notes:
IDU1
A
3
4
2
1
Switch
Ethernet
nodal
bus
IDU2
A
3
4
2
1
Switch
MAC Table
The MAC Table is a table created by the Ethernet Switch to keep trace of the reachability of the equipment
present in the network.
For the editing of the MAC Table, the Switch uses the MAC address (source) of the packets in input and the
number of the port through which a packet enters in the Switch as information source.
The source MAC of a packet in input to the Switch is subjected to Learning operation and possibly registered
in MAC Table.
The destination MAC of a packet in input to the Switch is subjected to search operation. If it is found in
MAC Table belonging as source MAC of another user, the port, which it is associated to, is used as destination of the considered traffic.
If the destination MAC Address is not present in the MAC Table, the Switch transmits the frame on all its
own interfaces, excluding only that where the frame itself has been received.
A MAC address, once stored in the table, is automatically deleted from the table itself if it is not used within
a given time period (Aging Time).
184
To define the validity period of the addresses stored in the MAC Table of the equipment (parameter MAC Addr. Aging Time).
To define if the learning of the Source Addresses must be made on a common MAC Table or on
specific partitions for every single VID registered in VTU (parameter MAC Learning Vid basis).
To enable/disable the automatic learning of MAC Address within the MAC Table for every single
port of the Ethernet Switch and, if enabled, to define if this learning must be made on a single
MAC Table common to the whole Switch or on a partition specific for the port (parameter MAC
Learning).
185
The LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4 commands manage the LANs of the Ethernet Switch.
On the choice of one of the commands, the LAN <selected Lan number> contextual area opens, where it
is possible to manage the specific LAN.
Operations
STATUS
PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN
to the output queue
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LAN
which, in output, the Tag is added to
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN
LLF
PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN
LOOP
Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN
SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL
PARAMETERS
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN
Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP)
Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP)
ETHERNET LINE PROTECTION (ELP)
PARAMETERS
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection
186
MODE PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
Full Rate. The LAN is enabled to the use of the maximum bit rate relevant to the port.
Kb/Mb. The LAN is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.
MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).
MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
187
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation
is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.
Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.
Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.
Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and
the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.
Auto FD up to 10M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are
negotiated with a maximum of 10Mbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.
Auto FD up to 100M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are
negotiated with a maximum of 100Mbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.
Auto FD up to 1G. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are
negotiated with a maximum of 1Gbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.
For LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:
Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.
Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 1GMbit/s.
If it was enabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to disable the parameter. If already disabled, the setting cannot be changed.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
The Flow Control Full Dplx/Back Pressure Half Dplx parameter indicates the activation status of the flow
control of the LAN:
Auto. The flow control is auto-negotiated and, if the remote equipment can manage the flow
control, it is automatically activated on the local equipment.
In Full-Duplex modality, the flow control is regulated according to the 802.3x normative. In Half-Duplex
modality, the flow control is regulated according to the Back Pressure technique.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
188
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet Switch is available only if enabled this func-
tion.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses must be
ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to enable
the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option). If already enabled, the setting cannot be changed.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
The MAC Learning parameter indicates the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):
Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table
takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a single MAC Table.
Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment of MAC Table indicized
by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic is income from.
Verify/modify the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Parameter meaningful only if the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the MAC Table is
enabled (Mac Learning).
Dest. Addr. Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic on VLAN basis (Port Based VLAN) and with
destination MAC address present in MAC Table.
Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic only on VLAN basis without checking the presence of destination MAC in MAC Table.
Full Rate. The value of maximum bit rate of the port is set as maximum throughput for LAN port.
...Kb/...Mb. The specific value is set as maximum throughput for LAN port.
The throughput is the real index of utilization of the link capacity, that is the amount of data transmitted
in the unit of time.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
Available values changes depending on the port transmission speed (see parameter Speed/Duplex).
3. Press Apply and confirm.
189
Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
(see Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the
operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN).
Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line (Loop Time).
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the
line synchronism for the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
(see Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the
operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN).
Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is automatic.
Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is
forced. In this case, the role defined in the Master/Slave box is used.
190
In order to use a PIRL instance for the traffic limitation, after its creation, it must be enabled (see Enable/
disable a PIRL instance of the LAN).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Rate Limiter tab.
3. Press Add.
4. Set, in the Rate box, the band threshold over which the traffic is limited.
The type of traffic to limit will be set in the next steps.
5. In the Broadcast box, select the option:
Enable. The transit of the Broadcast packets in input from the port is limited to the specific band.
Enable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets (Multicast packets with destination MAC
addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port is limited to the specific band.
Enable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets (Unicast packets with destination MAC addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port is limited to the specific band.
Enable. The transit of the Unicast packets in input from the port is limited to the specific band.
Enable. The transit of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) packets in input from the port is
limited to the specific band.
191
192
It is not possible to set, as ID, a value already used as Default Vid by another port or already used by
a reserved VLAN (see Virtual Lan Config. tab).
4. Press Apply and confirm.
If the message Default Vid already assigned to VLan in list. Continue anyway? is displayed, this means
that the entered value is used even as ID of a traffic VLAN. To continue the operation, press Yes and
confirm.
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
Disable 802-1Q. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They will
be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.
Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports belonging
to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports included in VLAN on port basis.
Secure. VID must be contained in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and the input pot must be member of
this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in
VLAN on port basis.
For each configuration (selection of the Disable 802-1Q, Fallback or Secure option) the table of Port
Based VLAN must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only on Tag base
(see Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN).
If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan table, the control of the Tag 802.1Q
(Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added or removed to the packets in output from the port.
Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority information
and VLAN identifier).
Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port: the
identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.
Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged by a Service Tag whose
identifier (EtherType) can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
The possible Service Tag is always removed, if present, to the packets incoming in this port.
Tag added in output is composed as follows:
193
If the source port of the packet was in Double Tag too, the original content is kept if the
packet had already a Service Tag (both as Service VID and as priority, unless 802.1p is
disabled on the input port, in which case the port default value is used as priority).
If the source port is NOT in Double Tag, added Service Tag is composed by the VLAN
identifier set in the box Default Vid of the input port and by the default priority of the port
itself if the priority 802.1p is disabled on it. If instead the option 802.1p is enabled on
the input port, the priority contained in Customer VID of the incoming packet (if present)
is kept.
When the Add Double Tag value is active, besides the insertion of a Tag (Provider Tag) on the packets
in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on the packets in input to the
same port.
The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
In a nodal system with the Trunking Radio modality enabled, when the option Add Double Tag (QinQ)
is active, for the traffic ports of the Switch (LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A) you must set the value Disable 8021Q for the parameter Ingress Filtering Check (the routing of the traffic is not managed according to the
VLAN Table).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
Disable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are not enabled
to transit from the specific LAN or Radio port.
Enable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are enabled to
transit from the specific LAN or Radio port (bidirectional connection).
194
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the
LAN to the output queue
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the level-3 priority (analysis of field PTOS/
DSCP) is not managed when the transit of the packets takes place through the nodal interconnection (see
Fig.5).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The Priority Selection parameter indicates the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input
to the LAN, to the output:
802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3) for the choice of the output
queue.
802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of
TOS for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p priority
for the choice of the output queue.
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the
LAN which, in output, the Tag is added to
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active.
195
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING For the correct configuration of the bidirectional LLF functionality for a radio link se Bidirectional
LLF (info).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the LLF tab.
The LLF parameter indicates the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality:
Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms (IDU
BRANCH Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO Link Id. Alarm) or if the Radio port is disabled.
Bidirectional, indicates that the block of the local LAN port due to LLF is communicated even to
the remote equipment (activation of bidirectional LLF functionality).
Rem. LAN-1, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 1 port associated to it.
Rem. LAN-2, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 2 port associated to it.
Rem. LAN-3, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 3 port associated to it.
Rem. LAN-4, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 4 port associated to it.
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2, if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a
node.
196
Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2, if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The STP/ELP parameter indicates the enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the port.
3. To change the parameter, select the value:
Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).
Enable-Prot1, Enable-Prot2. Spanning Tree protocol disabled. The Ethernet Line Protection of
the equipment is enabled.
node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The Priority parameter indicates the priority of the LAN (0: highest priority, 15: lowest priority).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The Value parameter indicates the cost of the network part directly connected to the LAN.
197
This cost determines, priority being equal among two or more redundant connections, the preference
of a port with respect to the others.
This cost must be inversely proportional to the bit rate of the port
3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.
It is suggested to set a value belonging to the Recommended Range according to what pointed out in
the Standard IEEE 802.1w.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2, if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a
node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.
Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2, if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The STP/ELP parameter indicates the enabling status of Ethernet Line Protection for the port.
3. To change the parameter, select the value:
Enable-Bridge1 - Enable-Bridge2. Ethernet Line Protection disabled. Spanning Tree protocol enabled.
Enable-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment) is enabled between the considered LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot1.
Enable-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot2.
Enable-node-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node) is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot1.
Enable-node-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot2.
Enable-node-Prot3. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot3.
Enable-node-Prot4. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot4.
198
node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.
If you wish to enable the Trunking modality, it is first necessary to disable the LAN.
Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2, if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The Trunk/LACP parameter indicates the enabling status of the Trunking mode for the selected port.
3. To change the parameter, select the value:
Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the equipment
LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk1.
Enable-Trunk2. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the equipment
LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk2.
Enable-Trunk3. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the equipment
LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk3.
Enable-Trunk4. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the equipment
LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk4.
199
Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real presence of the optical signal.
Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the
signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal
at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
To modify the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value comprised between
60 and 300 sec. (default 120 sec.). Select the Apply and confirm.
Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of laser functioning status).
200
201
Interface tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN.
Parameters
Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
Slave. The line synchronism is generated starting from the clock retrieved from the
line (Loop Time).
Parameter available only for the ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is
active (box Speed/Duplex - value Auto).
M/S Autoneg. Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism:
Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is automatic.
Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is forced. In this case, the role defined in the Master/Slave box is used.
Parameter available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
(box Speed/Duplex value Auto).
Rate Control. Enabling status of the port:
Full Rate. The LAN is enabled to the use of the max bit rate relevant to the port.
Kb/Mb. The LAN is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.
Forwarding Rule. Rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN:
Dest. Addr. Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic on VLAN basis (Port Based VLAN)
and with destination MAC address present in MAC Table.
Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic only on VLAN basis without checking the presence of destination MAC in MAC Table.
Parameter meaningful only if the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the MAC Table is
enabled (Mac Learning).
202
Flow Control Full Dplx / Back Pressure Half Dplx. Activation status of the flow control of
the port:
Auto. The flow control is auto-negotiated and, if the remote equipment can manage
the flow control, it is automatically activated on the local equipment.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the flow control must be DISABLED. If it was
enabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to disable the parameter. If already disabled, the setting cannot be changed.
Interface Type. Type of the interface:
MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card
modality).
MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
Parameter available only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of LAN is enabled
(box Rate Control value Full Rate or Kb/Mb).
Mac Learning. Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):
Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses
in the table takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a
single MAC Table.
Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of
the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment
of MAC Table indicized by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic
is income from.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses
must be ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to enable the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option). If already enabled, the setting cannot be changed.
Speed/Duplex. Activation status of the autonegotiation and, if the autonegotiation is deactivated, operating modalities and transmission speed of the port.
For LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with electrical interface, the following values are
available:
Auto FD up to 10M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are negotiated with a maximum of 10Mbit/s and with modality
Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.
Auto FD up to 100M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are negotiated with a maximum of 100Mbit/s and with modality
Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.
Auto FD up to 1G. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are negotiated with a maximum of 1Gbit/s and with modality
Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.
For LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:
203
Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is FullDuplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 1GMbit/s.
Full Rate. The value of maximum bit rate of the port is set as maximum throughput
for LAN port.
Kb/Mb. The specific value is set as maximum throughput for LAN port.
The throughput is the real index of utilization of the link capacity, that is the amount of data
transmitted in the unit of time.
Available values changes depending on the port transmission speed (see parameter Speed/Duplex).
Speed. Data transmission speed.
Duplex. Transmission modality.
Port Role. Current status of the line synchronism.
Parameter available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
(box Speed/Duplex value Auto).
Alarms. Status of the alarms relevant to the port. The colour of each box displays the status of
the alarm:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
Push-button
Restart Autonegotiation. Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN.
See also
Not Active. The instance is not used by the Switch as rule for the traffic limitation.
Active. The instance is used by the Switch as rule for the traffic limitation.
204
Enable. The transit of the Broadcast packets is limited to the specific band.
Unknown Multicast. Limitation of the Multicast Unknown packets (Multicast packets with destination MAC addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port:
Enable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets is limited to the specific band.
Unknown Unicast. Limitation of the Unicast Unknown packets (Unicast packets with destination MAC addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port:
Enable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets is limited to the specific band.
Enable. The transit of the Unicast packets is limited to the specific band.
ARP. Limitation of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) packets in input from the port:
Enable. The transit of the ARP packets is limited to the specific band.
Push-button
VLan(802.1Q) tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to VLAN management.
Parameters
Ingress Filtering Check. Control status of Tag Vlan ID on the messages in input from the port:
Disable 802-1Q. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input.
They will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.
Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table Unit
(VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports
belonging to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the
ports included in VLAN on port basis.
Secure. VID must be contained in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and the input pot must be
member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in VLAN on port basis.
Force Default Vid. Forces the over-writing of the native CTag of the traffic in input to the LAN
with the corresponding default VID:
205
Frame Egress Mode. Behaviour of the port towards the packets in output:
Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added or removed
to the packets in output from the port.
Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority
information and VLAN identifier).
Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from
the port: the identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.
Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged by a Service
Tag whose identifier (EtherType) can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
The possible Service Tag is always removed, if present, to the packets incoming in
this port.
Tag added in output is composed as follows:
If the source port of the packet was in Double Tag too, the original content is
kept if the packet had already a Service Tag (both as Service VID and as priority, unless 802.1p is disabled on the input port, in which case the port default value is used as priority).
If the source port is NOT in Double Tag, added Service Tag is composed by the
VLAN identifier set in the box Default Vid of the input port and by the default
priority of the port itself if the priority 802.1p is disabled on it. If instead the
option 802.1p is enabled on the input port, the priority contained in Customer
VID of the incoming packet (if present) is kept.
Disable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are
not enabled to transit through the specific LAN or Radio port.
Enable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are
enabled to transit through the specific LAN or Radio port (bidirectional connection).
See also
Priority Selection. Priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the port, to the
output:
206
802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the
output queue.
802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the
value of TOS for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p
priority for the choice of the output queue.
Default Priority. Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the port which,
in output, the Tag is added to:
0. Lowest priority
7. Highest priority.
Table. Mapping of priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input
to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value):
802-1p INPUT Priority. Each row correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the packet in output from the Switch: 7 0.
802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping. Each column correspond to Tag 802.1p value of
the packet in output from the Switch.
The active option indicates the combination: Tag 802.1p in input to the Switch - Tag 802.1p in
output from the Switch.
Table available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active (see parameter Priority Selection).
See also
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the
output queue
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LAN which,
in output, the Tag is added to
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN
LLF tab
The tab displays the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Parameters
Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms
(IDU BRANCH Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO Link Id. Alarm) or if the Radio port
is disabled.
Bidirectional, indicates that the block of the local LAN port due to LLF is communicated
even to the remote equipment (activation of bidirectional LLF functionality).
Rem. LAN-1, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on
the remote LAN 1 port associated to it.
Rem. LAN-2, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on
the remote LAN 2 port associated to it.
Rem. LAN-3, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on
the remote LAN 3 port associated to it.
Rem. LAN-4, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on
the remote LAN 4 port associated to it.
See also
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN
Bidirectional LLF (info)
207
See also
STP/ELP. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol or of the of the Ethernet Line Protection
for the port:
Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).
Enable-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot1.
Enable-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot2.
Enable-node-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot1.
Enable-node-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot2.
Enable-node-Prot3. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot3.
Enable-node-Prot4. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot4.
208
root-port. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the Bridge selected as
root. Each Bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is
at steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status.
alternate-port. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.
ELP
designated-port. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used
to propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated
port is in port-forwarding status.
backup-port. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same
Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status.
ENABLED.
Role assigned by the ELP to each port. The role defines the behaviour of the port:
alternate-port. Port in stand-by status, as it offers an alternative path with higher cost
as opposed to the Designated port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.
Receive
traffic
Forward
traffic
No
No
port-blocking
No
port-learning
Yes
port-forwarding
Yes
Yes
Update the
Address Table Unit
Receive/process BPDU
Re-transmit
BPDU
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
STP
port-disable
ELP
ENABLED
ENABLED
port-blocking
No
No
No
port-forwarding
Yes
Yes
Yes
Version (STP/ELP area). Version of the Spanning Tree protocol or protection group of the port:
Parameter not meaningful when Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-node-Prot... value).
Priority. Port priority:
0. Highest priority
209
Partner Id (Trunk/LACP area). MAC Address of the remote equipment located at the other end
of the Ethernet connection (remote Switch).
Tx Pck Cnt (Trunk/LACP area). LACP packets transmitted to the remote Switch.
Rx Pck Cnt (Trunk/LACP area). LACP packets received from the remote Switch.
Push-button
Refresh (area STP/ELP). Update the values present in the specific area.
Refresh (area Trunk/LACP). Update the values present in the specific area.
See also
The tab displays the configuration of the LAN with optical interface.
Parameters
Unknown. The laser module is not among those listed above (possible anomaly of the
laser module).
For more information relevant to laser module refer to IEEE standard 802.3.
Wave Length. Wave length (in nanometres) of the SFP optical module (Small Form-factor Pluggable).
Link Length. Maximum distance (in meters) of the optical fiber supported by the SFP optical
module.
Mode. Transmission mode of the laser. If active, the option:
210
Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the
real presence of the optical signal.
Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal:
when the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the
laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds
every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote
transmitter: if the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit,
while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of test laser operation status).
Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller
before trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto).
Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the
laser during the testing operation.
Push-button
211
The threshold over which the traffic is limited (traffic bit rate available with respect to the total
band).
Broadcast traffic.
Multicast Unknown traffic (Multicast packets with destination MAC address not present in
the MAC Table).
Unicast Unknown traffic (Unicast packets with destination MAC address not present in the
MAC Table).
Unicast traffic.
ARP traffic.
One or more traffic types can be associated to the threshold creating the wished criterion.
A maximum of 2 PIRL instances can be created for every single LAN.
Every instance must be created by the user.
After the creation, a PIRL instance must be enabled by the user in order to be used as rule for the traffic
limitation.
In any moment, the instance can be disabled, changed in its setting or deleted.
See also
212
WARNING The use of the Spanning Tree protocol must be enabled at level of single port.
The use of the Spanning Tree protocol for the LANs is alternative to the use of the Ethernet Line Protection,
Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the use of the Spanning Tree protocol can be enabled/
disabled for the Ethernet traffic ports (LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A and Port B).
The management of the Ethernet nodal interconnection ports (LAN 1 and LAN 2) is responsibility of the
system which ensures that no data loop is created.
Even in this case, the use of the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A and Port B is alternative to the use of the Ethernet Line Protection (only LANs), Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality.
213
nated), cost and priority being equal, the port with the lower physical position is keep active.
The values of Role and Port Status foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol have
been used to represent in WEB CT page the status of the ports involved in the ELP switch:
214
LAN
Role
Port status
Operating
Designated
Forwarding
Reserve
Alternate
Blocking
The user can manage the criteria for the choice of the operating/reserve port executing the following operations:
To enable/disable the ELP equipment functionality on the LANs you wish to protect (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-Prot1 or Enable-Prot2 value).
WARNING The use of the equipment ELP functionality for each LAN is alternative to the use of Spanning
Tree, Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the use of the equipment ELP functionality can be enabled/disabled only for the Ethernet traffic ports (LAN 3 and LAN 4).
In this case, the use of the equipment ELP functionality (besides the use of the Spanning Tree protocol,
Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality) is alternative to the use of the node ELP functionality.
enabled and are operating (status Designated), cost and priority being equal, the port with the lower physical position is keep active.
The physical position of the traffic LANs of a node is the following:
215
The values of Role and Port Status foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol have
been used to represent in WEB CT page the status of the ports involved in the ELP switch:
LAN
Role
Port status
Operating
Designated
Forwarding
Reserve
Alternate
Blocking
The user can manage the criteria for the choice of the operating/reserve port executing the following operations:
To enable/disable the ELP node functionality on the LANs you wish to protect (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-Node-Prot1, Enable-Node-Prot2, Enable-Node-Prot3 or Enable-Node-Prot4 value).
WARNING The use of the node ELP function for the LAN 3 and LAN 4 ports is alternative to the use of the
equipment ELP functionality, Spanning Tree protocol, Trunking mode or Ring Protection modality.
Node A
Lan 3
Lan 4
Lan 3
Ethernet
traffic
Lan 4
Lan 3
Lan 4
Lan 3
Lan 4
(1)
216
(1)
A.1
(1)
A.2
A.3
(1)
A.4
A.1, A.2, A.3 and A.4. Respectively first, second, third and fourth equipment of the node interconnected to the Ethernet nodal Bus.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the use of the Trunking mode can be enabled/disabled
only for the LAN 3, LAN 4 (Ethernet traffic ports).
Even in this case, the use of the Trunking mode is alternative to the use of the Ethernet Line Protection,
Spanning Tree protocol or Ring Protection modality.
If the Trunking modality is active for an LAN and you wish to disable it, before executing the operation it
is necessary to disable the port itself.
The modality is furthermore available when the equipment is in 1+0, 1+1 Freq. Div, 1+1 Hot Standby or
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration with active East-West modality. In this last configuration, the
radio Trunking modality is not available for the Radio port B (Port B).
The radio Trunking mode allows aggregating more radio of a nodal system.
The functionality manages an aggregation group (Trunk): Enable-Trunk1.
To insert a radio port of a Switch in the Trunk, it is necessary to enable the radio Trunking mode for this
port (Enable-Trunk1).
In this mode, up to 4 radio ports can be aggregated.
WARNING The use of the radio Trunking mode is alternative to the use of the Spanning Tree protocol or
217
218
Port A, Port B
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING The availability of the Radio ports depends on the equipment configuration as shown in Tab.11
The Port A and Port B commands manage the Radio ports of the Ethernet Switch.
On the choice of one of the commands, the <port name> contextual area opens, where it is possible to
manage the specific Radio port:
Operations
STATUS
PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the Radio
port to the output queue
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the Radio
port which, in output, the Tag is added to
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the Radio port
SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL (STP)
PARAMETERS
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the Radio port
Verify/modify the priority of the Radio port (STP)
Verify/modify the connection cost of the Radio port (STP)
TRUNKING
MODE PARAMETERS
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Trunking mode
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the Radio port
GUI
Ethernet Enh
Ethernet Radio
ports
Unequipped
Absent
Port A
1+0
Absent
Port A
Absent
Port A
Absent
Port A - Port B
219
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the Radio
port
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet Switch is available only if enabled this func-
tion.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses must be
ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to enable
the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option). If already enabled, the setting cannot be changed.
1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
The MAC Learning parameter indicates the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):
Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table
takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a single MAC Table.
Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment of MAC Table indicized
by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic is income from.
220
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the Radio port
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
Disable 802-1Q. The Radio port does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They
will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.
Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports belonging
to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports included in VLAN on port basis.
Secure. VID must be contained in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and the input pot must be member of
this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in
VLAN on port basis.
For each configuration (selection of the value Disable 802-1Q, Fallback and Secure) the table of Port
Based VLAN must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only on Tag base
(see Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port).
If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan table, the control of the Tag 802.1Q
(Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
Verify/modify the behaviour of the Radio port towards the packets in output
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added or removed to the packets in output from the port.
Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority information
and VLAN identifier).
Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port: the
identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.
Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged by a Service Tag whose
identifier (EtherType) can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
The possible Service Tag is always removed, if present, to the packets incoming in this port.
Tag added in output is composed as follows:
If the source port of the packet was in Double Tag too, the original content is kept if the
packet had already a Service Tag (both as Service VID and as priority, unless 802.1p is
disabled on the input port, in which case the port default value is used as priority).
If the source port is NOT in Double Tag, added Service Tag is composed by the VLAN
identifier set in the box Default Vid of the input port and by the default priority of the port
itself if the priority 802.1p is disabled on it. If instead the option 802.1p is enabled on
the input port, the priority contained in Customer VID of the incoming packet (if present)
is kept.
In a nodal system with the Trunking Radio modality enabled, when the option Add Double Tag (QinQ)
is active, for the traffic ports of the Switch (LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A) you must set the value Disable 802-
221
1Q for the parameter Ingress Filtering Check (the routing of the traffic is not managed according to the
VLAN Table).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
Force the value of VID of the Radio port to the default value
Access | Read & Write
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
Disable. The packets, in input from the Radio port, are not enabled to transit from the specific
LAN or Radio port.
Enable. The packets, in input from the Radio port, are enabled to transit from the specific LAN
or Radio port (bidirectional connection).
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the
Radio port to the output queue
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the level-3 priority (analysis of field PTOS/
DSCP) is not managed when the transit of the packets takes place through the nodal interconnection (see
Fig.5).
1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The Priority Selection parameter indicates the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input
to the Radio port, to the output:
222
802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3) for the choice of the output
queue.
802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of
TOS for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p priority
for the choice of the output queue.
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the
Radio port which, in output, the Tag is added to
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the Radio port
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active.
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
223
Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Trunking mode
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
224
The Trunking modality cannot be enabled when the Spanning Tree protocol or Ring Protection mode is enabled.
1. Select Base Band > Port A or Port B.
2. Select the STP/Trunking tab.
The Trunk/LACP parameter indicates the enabling status of the Trunking mode for the selected port.
3. To change the parameter, select the value:
225
Interface tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Radio ports.
Parameters
Mac Learning. Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):
Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses
in the table takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a
single MAC Table.
Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of
the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment
of MAC Table indicized by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic
is income from.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses
must be ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to enable the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option). If already enabled, the setting cannot be changed.
See also
VLan(802.1Q) tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Radio port relevant to VLAN management
Parameters
Ingress Filtering Check. Control status of Tag Vlan ID on the messages in input from the port:
226
Disable 802-1Q. The Radio port does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in
input. They will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.
Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table Unit
(VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports
belonging to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the
ports included in VLAN on port basis.
Secure. VID must be contained in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and the input pot must be
member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in VLAN on port basis.
Force Default Vid. Forcing of the VID value of the Radio port to the default value:
Frame Egress Mode. Behaviour of the port towards the packets in output:
Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added or removed
to the packets in output from the port.
Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority
information and VLAN identifier).
Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from
the port: the identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.
Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged by a Service
Tag whose identifier (EtherType) can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
The possible Service Tag is always removed, if present, to the packets incoming in
this port.
Tag added in output is composed as follows:
If the source port of the packet was in Double Tag too, the original content is
kept if the packet had already a Service Tag (both as Service VID and as priority, unless 802.1p is disabled on the input port, in which case the port default value is used as priority).
If the source port is NOT in Double Tag, added Service Tag is composed by the
VLAN identifier set in the box Default Vid of the input port and by the default
priority of the port itself if the priority 802.1p is disabled on it. If instead the
option 802.1p is enabled on the input port, the priority contained in Customer
VID of the incoming packet (if present) is kept.
Disable. The packets, in input from the Radio port which the contextual area refers
to, are not enabled to transit through the specific LAN or Radio port.
Enable. The packets, in input from the Radio port, are enabled to transit through the
specific LAN or Radio port (bidirectional connection).
See also
227
Priority Selection. Priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the port, to the
output:
802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the
output queue.
802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the
value of TOS for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p
priority for the choice of the output queue.
Default Priority. Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the port which,
in output, the Tag is added to:
0. Lowest priority
7. Highest priority.
Table. Mapping of priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input
to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value):
802-1p INPUT Priority. Each row correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the packet in output from the Switch: 7 0.
802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping. Each column correspond to Tag 802.1p value of
the packet in output from the Switch.
The active option indicates the combination: Tag 802.1p in input to the Switch - Tag 802.1p in
output from the Switch.
Table available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active (see parameter Priority Selection).
See also
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the Radio port to
the output queue
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the Radio port
which, in output, the Tag is added to
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the Radio port
STP tab
WARNING Tab available only if the equipment is not a node element or is a TDM element.
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol.
Parameters
STP. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the port:
Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).
If the Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable is automatically forced for the parameter.
Role (STP area). Role assigned by the Spanning Tree protocol to each port of a Bridge/Switch.
The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the Bridge in the network:
228
root-port. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the Bridge selected as
root. Each Bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is
at steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status.
alternate-port. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.
designated-port. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used
to propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated
port is in port-forwarding status.
backup-port. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same
Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status.
Receive
traffic
Receive/
process BPDU
Re-transmit BPDU
No
No
No
No
No
port-blocking
No
No
No
Yes
No
port-learning
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
port-forwarding
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0. Highest priority
Value (Path Cost area). Cost of the network part directly connected to the port.
Recommended Max / Recommended Min (Path Cost area). Cost interval recommended according to what pointed out in Standard IEEE 802.1w.
Push-button
Refresh (STP area). Update the value present in the specific area.
See also
STP/Trunking tab
WARNING Tab available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol r to the Trunking modality.
Parameters
STP. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the port:
Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).
If the Trunking modality or Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable is automatically
forced for the parameter.
229
Role (STP area). Role assigned by the Spanning Tree protocol to each port of a Bridge/Switch.
The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the Bridge in the network:
root-port. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the Bridge selected as
root. Each Bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is
at steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status.
alternate-port. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.
designated-port. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used
to propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated
port is in port-forwarding status.
backup-port. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same
Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status.
Receive
traffic
Receive/
process BPDU
Re-transmit BPDU
No
No
No
No
No
port-blocking
No
No
No
Yes
No
port-learning
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
port-forwarding
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0. Highest priority
If the STP or Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable is automatically forced for the
parameter.
Push-button
Refresh (STP area). Update the value present in the specific area.
See also
230
Spanning Tree
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING The change of the default values of the configuration (Hello Time, Forward Delay, Max Age) of
the Spanning Tree protocol could damage the correct operation of the Spanning Tree protocol itself.
The Spanning Tree command manages the spanning tree in the network.
Operations
rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol characterized
by a greater speed (lower convergence time).
231
232
Setting tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Spanning Tree protocol.
Parameters
Hello Time. Time interval that passes between two consecutive transmissions of the BPDU
(Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packet from the Ethernet ports with the Spanning Tree function enabled.
Forward Delay. Time interval which passes between the passage between the port-blocking
status and the port-learning status and between the port-learning status and the port-forwarding status of the port.
Max Age. Maximum number of switches which the packet can pass through before expiring.
The passage from a Switch to another one involves the decrease of 1 second per equipment.
See also
Summary tab
The tab displays the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol or to the Ethernet
Line Protection (only LANs).
233
Parameters
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol or of the Ethernet
Line Protection for the specific LAN:
Enable Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
Enable Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).
Enable Pro1. Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment) enabled
(Protection1).
Enable Node Pro1. Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node) enabled (Node
Protection1).
Port A, Port B. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the specific Radio port:
Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).
The availability of the Radio ports depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.11).
Role. This parameter has a different meaning depending on the enabled protocol/modality:
STP ENABLED. Role assigned by the STP to each port of a Bridge/Switch. The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the Bridge in the network:
ELP
Root. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the Bridge selected as root.
Each Bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is at
steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status.
Alternate. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards
the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate
port is in port-blocking status.
Designated. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used to
propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated
port is in port-forwarding status.
Backup. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same
Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status.
ENABLED.
Role assigned by the ELP to each port. The role defines the behaviour of the port:
Alternate. Port in stand-by status, as it offers an alternative path with higher cost as
opposed to the Designated port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.
Receive
traffic
Forward
traffic
Update the
Address Table Unit
STP
Receive/process BPDU
Re-transmit
BPDU
ENABLED
port-disable
No
No
No
No
No
port-blocking
No
No
No
Yes
No
port-learning
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
port-forwarding
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
port-blocking
No
No
No
port-forwarding
Yes
Yes
Yes
ELP
ENABLED
Version. Version of the Spanning Tree protocol or protection group of the port:
234
Parameter not meaningful when Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-node-Prot... value).
Push-button
Bridges tab
The tab displays the MAC Address and the priority of the Bridge 1 and Bridge 2.
Parameters
235
Ring Protection
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the Eth ring protection functionality is enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or more
features can be enabled.
The Ring Protection modality implements, for ALCplus2e equipment, the standard G.8032 defined in Recommendation ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching (03/2010), which you are referred
to for a detailed description of the modality.
The command Ring Protection manages the Ring Protection modality which allows managing the protection in ring Ethernet networks (ERPS - Ethernet Ring Protection Switching) and avoids the creation of loops
through a RPL connection (Ring Protection Link).
ALCplus2e equipment allows implementing, on the same physical ring, a maximum of two ERP instances
(Ethernet Ring Protection) which protects a set of VLANs.
Operations
Verify the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances
Change the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances
Verify the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance
Change the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance
Enable/disable the Ring Protection modality for an ERP instance
Enable/disable the manual commands to block a port of an ERP instance
Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance
Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance
Verify to which ERP instance the traffic of each equipment VLAN is routed
Associate a VLAN to an ERP instance
GUI
Verify the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
Change the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances
Access | Read & Write
WARNING When the Ring Protection modality is active for at least one ERP instance, the parameters cannot
be changed, except the fields WTR (min) and Guard (ms).
236
4. Set, in WTR (min) box, the time which has to pass to restore the RPL link (block of Owner port) after
the clear of a failure (in absence of management commands executed by the operators and with ERP
Revertive operation enabled - see Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs).
Value between 1 and 12 minutes (default 5).
RPL (Ring Protection Link) connection is the link of the ERP instance which, in normal operating conditions (absence of failure), is blocked (at one or both ends) for the traffic channel in order to avoid the
loop generation.
5. Set, in Guard (ms) box, the time waited by every port of the instance before changing its own status.
Value between 10 and 2000 milliseconds (default 500ms).
6. Set, in CFM/CCM Interval box, the forwarding interval of CCM messages (reserved to G.8032) which
allow monitoring the ERP instance by detecting any possible interruption (Signal Failure):
10 ms. 10 milliseconds.
7. Set, in Not Assigned Traffic box, the ERP instance which the traffic without Tag or the traffic with Tag,
but not assigned to any instance, must be routed to (see VLan/Ring Binding tab):
Verify the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
Change the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance
Access | Read & Write
WARNING When the Ring Protection modality is active for a specific ERP instance, the parameters cannot
be changed, except for the fields Ring Name and Manual Command.
237
WARNING Set a different VLAN identifier for tab Ring 1 and tab Ring 2. Moreover, the value must be
different from that set as default identifier of the Ethernet ports (Default Vid) and as identifier of the
management VLAN.
6. Set, in ERP Revertive box, the ERP Revertive modality for the specific ERP instance:
7. For each one of the two ports (areas Ethernet Port Binding) constituting the ends of the link belonging
to the specific ERP instance, set the following parameters:
a. Set, in Lan Port box, the Ethernet port where the links ends.
It is not possible to set the same Ethernet port in the two Lan Port fields.
If the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection (only LAN) or the Trunking modality
is enabled for the port, the Ring Protection modality cannot be set for the specific instance.
The selected port must have the option 802.1Q enabled in order to correctly manage the relevant VLAN.
b. Set, in RPL Role box, the port role:
None. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance, but it is not one of the ends of
the protection link RPL (Ring Protection Link). In normal operating conditions, the port
allows the transit of the traffic.
All the ports which end to the links of ERP instance where the traffic in routed must be
configured with this role.
Owner. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance and it is one of the ends of the
protection link (RPL). In normal operating conditions, the port is blocked to the transit of
the traffic. Moreover, the port with this role actuates the ERP Revertive modality (if active).
Neighbor. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance and it is one of the ends of
the protection link (RPL). In normal operating conditions, the port is blocked to the transit
of the traffic.
The value Owner or Neighbor cannot be set in both the RPL Role fields.
c. Set, in MEP ID field, the identifier of the MEP (for G.8032) associated to the port.
Value between 1 and 8191.
The MEP identifier must be assigned to all the ports which end to the links of ERP instance. The
value must be different for every port.
8. Press Apply and confirm.
238
Enable. The Ring Protection modality is active for the specific ERP instance: the transmission of
CCM messages is enabled for the detection of a possible break in the ring.
Disable. The Ring Protection modality is not active for the specific ERP instance.
Operation meaningful only if the Ring Protection modality is active for the ERP instance.
It is possible to execute a single manual command at a time in the same ERP instance.
1. Select Base Band > Ring Protection.
2. Select the tab Ring 1 or Ring 2 depending on the ERP instance for which you wish to execute the operation.
The Manual Command parameter indicates the enabling status of the maintenance manual commands
for the specific port.
3. To change the parameter select the option:
Forced Switch. The forced block of the port is activated. Command actuated even if there is a
break in the ring.
Manual Switch. The forced block of the port is activated. Command actuated only if there is not
a break in the ring.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating a forcing (selection of Forced Switch or Manual Switch option), a message
warns you are executing a forcing and indicates the current setting of the relevant timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The activation of the forcing activates the alarm MAN. OP. If the equipment is switched off and then
switched on, no forcing will be active on the port independently from the previous setting.
Operation to execute after a failure and consequent re-configuration of the ring links. When the failure signal is cleared, the Revert push-button will be available to restore the RPL link.
1. Select Base Band > Ring Protection.
2. Select the tab Ring 1 or Ring 2 depending on the ERP instance for which you wish to execute the operation.
3. Press Revert.
239
Verify to which ERP instance the traffic of each equipment VLAN is routed
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
Not Assigned. The traffic of the specific VLAN is not associated to a specific instance. It is routed
to the ERP instance set for the traffic without Tag (see parameter Not Assigned Traffic - Common
tab).
Ring 1. The traffic of the specific VLAN is routed to the first ERP instance.
Ring 2. The traffic of the specific VLAN is routed to the second ERP instance.
240
Common tab. General configuration of the Ring Protection modality (OAM domain used for
G.8032, times of protection recovery after a failure detection, etc.).
Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs. Enabling status of the Ring Protection modality and configuration parameters of the specific ERP instance.
VLan/Ring Binding tab. For every VLAN present in VLAN Table, the ERP instance to which the
VLAN traffic is routed is indicated.
Push-button
Common tab
The tab displays the general configuration parameters of the Ring Protection modality (OAM domain used
for G.8032, time of protection recovery after a failure detection, etc.)
Parameters
0. Lowest priority.
7. Highest priority.
WTR (min) (area Delay). Period which must pass so the RPL link is restored (block of the Owner
port) after the failure clear (in absence of management commands actuated by the operator and
with ERP Revertive operation enabled - see Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs).
Guard (ms) (area Delay). Period waited by every port of the instance before changing its own
status.
WTB (ms) (area Delay). Period which must pass before a manual command is really executed
(Forced Switch/Manual Switch).
Read-only parameter because the value is automatically set to 5000 ms more than the value set
in the Guard (ms) field.
CFM/CCM Interval. Interval for the transmission of the CCM messages (reserved to G.8032)
which allows monitoring the ERP instance detecting any possible interruption (Signal Failure):
10 ms. 10 milliseconds.
Not Assigned Traffic. ERP instance which the traffic without Tag, or the traffic with Tag but
not assigned to any instance, is routed to (see VLan/Ring Binding tab):
See also
Change the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances
241
WARNING First time you set the parameters or after a restore operation of the factory settings, the tab is
disabled. To enable it, select the message Locked. To create the Ring...
Each tab displays the enabling status of the Ring Protection modality and the configuration parameters for
the specific ERP instance.
Parameters
Status. Enabling status of Ring Protection modality for the specific instance:
Enable. The Ring Protection modality is active for the specific ERP instance: the transmission of CCM messages is enabled for the detection of a possible break in the ring.
Disable. The Ring Protection modality is not active for the specific ERP instance.
UnAvailable. Unavailable modality because the parameters have never been configured or have been restored to the factory values.
---. Status not available because the Ring Protection modality is not active.
Idle. The ERP instance is in nominal conditions (no failure) and the traffic is transmitted according to the scheme defined for the ring.
Protection. The ERP instance is in protection: at least one failure has been detected
in the ring and the links have been reorganized to ensure the transit of the traffic in
the ring. All the ports are in status Forwarding.
Pending. The ERP instance is in transitory status between the status Protection and
the status Idle (for example, during WTR time).
Lan Port. Port of the Ethernet Switch where the link ends.
RPL Role. Role of the specific port:
None. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance, but it is not one of the ends
of the protection link RPL (Ring Protection Link). In normal operating conditions, the
port allows the transit of the traffic.
Owner. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance and it is one of the ends of
the protection link (RPL). In normal operating conditions, the port is blocked to the
transit of the traffic. Moreover, the port with this role actuates the ERP Revertive modality (if active).
Neighbor. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance and it is one of the ends
of the protection link (RPL). In normal operating conditions, the port is blocked to the
transit of the traffic.
MEP ID. Identifier of the MEP (for G.8032) associated to the specific port.
Manual Command. Enabling status of the manual maintenance commands for the specific
port:
242
Forced Switch. The forced block of the port is activated. Command actuated even if
there is a failure in the ring.
Manual Switch. The forced block of the port is activated. Command actuated only if
there is not failure in the ring.
Operative Status. Port for which the Ring Protection modality is not enabled.
Forwarding. Port which ends a link of the ERP instance where the traffic is routed. The
link is not alarmed (nominal condition).
Blocked. Port blocked because it ends to the RPL link or because a manual command
is active (Forced Switch/Manual Switch).
Push-button
Change the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance
Enable/disable the Ring Protection modality for an ERP instance
Enable/disable the manual commands to block a port of an ERP instance
Not Assigned. The traffic of the specific VLAN is not associated to any specific instance. It is routed to the ERP instance set for the traffic without Tag (see parameter
Not Assigned Traffic - Common tab).
Ring 1. The traffic of the specific VLAN is routed to the first ERP instance.
Ring 2. The traffic of the specific VLAN is routed to the second ERP instance.
See also
243
TDM Tributaries
244
E1
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
E1 contextual area
Disable. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this condition, the alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of the Los Inversion box.
Enable. The tributary is active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller does not inhibit
the alarms.
Press Enable All to set the Enable value for all the tributaries.
Press Disable All to set the Disable value for all the tributaries.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
245
If the tributary is enabled and you are disabling it, the message Do you want Los Inversion enable? is
displayed. Pressing:
Yes, the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.
No, the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.
Line Loop indicates the loop status on line side for every single tributary: Line Loop Enabled
(loop active), ---- (loop inactive).
Internal Loop indicates the loop status on internal side for every single tributary: Int. Loop Enabled (loop active), ---- (loop inactive).
2. To modify the loop status, select the relevant box and then the option:
The activation of the loop on internal side automatically enables the tributary, if this is already enabled.
3. Press Apply.
If at least one loop is going to be activated, a message is displayed that warns that you are executing
a forcing and the current setting of the timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of, at least, one loop causes the activation of the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is
switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the loops are deactivated.
Los inversion. The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled,
the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
No Los Inversion. The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary
disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
246
E1 contextual area
The context displays the status and the configuration of the 2Mbit/s tributaries.
Every table row corresponds to a tributary.
The number of available tributaries changes according to the equipment type.
The first row of the box refers to the first tributary of expansion (E1-1), the second row to the second tributary of expansion (E1-2) and so on up to 16th or 32nd row (according to the type of equipped expansion)
representing the last tributary of the expansion.
The last 2 rows of the table represent the E1s of the base board (Tributary A and Tributary B).
Parameters
Disable (white box). Tributary not active (tributary not used). In this condition, the
alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of
the Los Inversion box.
Enable (green box). Tributary active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller
does not inhibit the alarms.
If the tributary A and/or B is not available (Unavailable label - grey box), this means that the
tributary is not available for the traffic as already used as synchronism in output (see Synchronisation).
Line Loop. Line side loop status:
Los Inversion. Management of LOS alarm when the tributary is not used:
Los inversion (green box). The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised if,
with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
--- (white box). The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
The status of the Los Inversion box IS MEANINGFUL ONLY if the tributary is not used.
LOS Alarm / AIS Alarm. The colour of box indicates the status of the relevant alarm:
Red, orange, yellow or light blue (LOS or AIS wording). The alarm is active and has
severity, respectively, Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
Push-button
247
STM-1
248
The (Lim A STM-1 [2]) command is available only if the protection of STM-1 (MSP mode) is active or if the
management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST mode).
The x value indicates the STM-1 which the command is referred to (1, 2).
The Lim A STM-1 [x] command manages the configuration of the specific STM-1.
Operations
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
The STM-1 Status parameter indicates the status of the STM-1:
Not Active. The STM-1 is not active (unused stream). In this condition, the alarms are inhibited
and the LOS alarm is raised, with disabled stream the STM-1 signal is however connected.
Active. The STM-1 is active (used stream). In this condition, the controller does not inhibit the
alarms.
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and internal side)
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
The Line Side Loop parameter indicates the status of the STM-1 loop on line side:
249
The Internal Side Loop parameter indicates the status of the STM-1 loop on internal side:
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
The Type parameter indicates the enabling status of the J0 byte used for the control of STM-1 signal:
1 Byte Control. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 1 byte. The
inconsistency between the waited byte and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace
Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
16 Bytes Control. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte.
The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
Into the J0 Path Trace area the sequences of the characters at transmission and/or at reception relevant
to J0 byte used for the control of STM-1 signal is pointed out.
2. To change the parameter, type a new string of ASCII characters into the box:
The number of characters that has to constitute the sequence depends on the selected option pushbutton into the Type area (1 or 16 bytes).
3. Press Apply and confirm.
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
250
In the Alarms area, for each STM-1 alarm, there is a box containing the alarm name. The colour of the
boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major,
Minor, Warning severity.
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
2. Select the Thresholds tab.
The B2 Signal Degrade Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm
according to the error degree calculated on the byte B2 of the STM-1 signal:
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
2. Select the Thresholds tab.
The B2 Excessive BER Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B2 of the STM-1 signal:
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
The tab displays the current status and the configuration parameters of the laser.
251
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
The Laser Control parameter indicates the enabling status of the laser:
Disabled. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real presence of the optical signal.
Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the
signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal
at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
To modify the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value comprised between
60 and 300 sec. Press Apply and confirm.
Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (test operation laser functioning status).
WARNING If the management of STM-1 is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality, Automatic Laser Shut-
down function is permanently disabled. This means that the laser transmission modality is forced to
Disable. In this case, the change operation here below is not available.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are setting Disable, Manual or Test as transmission modality for the laser, a message warns
that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The selection of a modality different from Auto activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the user turns off the
equipment and then turns it on again, without taking into any account the preceding setting, the transmission mode of the laser is Auto.
252
Verify/modify the transport status of the bytes of SOH frame on an E1 Radio channel
Access | Verify: Read Only. Modify: Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the management of STM-1 in MST mode is active.
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
2. Select the SOH Transport tab.
253
The Radio E1 Selection parameter indicates the high priority Radio E1 channel (Permanent) currently
used for the transport of the content of SOH frame in radio:
Permanent 1A <E1 Radio number>. The transport of the bytes of SOH frame on the specific Permanent E1 channel of Radio 1A is active.
Permanent 2A <E1 Radio number>. The transport of the bytes of SOH frame on the specific Permanent E1 channel of Radio 2A is active.
Not Selected. The transport in radio of the SOH frame is not active.
None available. Radio not available (radio unequipped or in failure) or the number of Permanent
channels is set to 0.
254
Settings tab. Status, loop, J0 Trace Identifier configuration and STM-1 alarms.
Thresholds tab. Threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm and B2 Excessive BER alarm.
Laser Control tab. Configuration of the STM-1 with optical interface.
SOH Transport tab. Status of the transport of the SOH bytes on a Radio e1 channel.
Push-button
Settings tab
The tab displays the configuration of the specific STM-1 (status, loop, J0 Trace Identifier configuration and
STM-1 alarms).
Parameters
Not Active. The STM-1 is not active (unused stream). In this condition, the alarms are
inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised, with disabled stream the STM-1 signal is however connected.
Active. The STM-1 is active (used stream). In this condition, the controller does not
inhibit the alarms.
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
255
See also
Thresholds tab
The tab displays the configuration of the specific STM-1 (threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm and B2
Excessive BER alarm).
Parameters
See also
The tab displays the configuration of the specific STM-1 with optical interface.
Parameters
256
optical-I1. I type laser module (application: Intra office), 1 (STM level: Stm-1).
Unknown. The laser module is not one of the above listed modules (possible anomaly
of the laser module).
Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the
real presence of the optical signal.
Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal:
when the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the
laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds
every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote
transmitter: if the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit,
while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of test laser operation status).
If the management of STM-1 in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality is active, Automatic Laser Shutdown
function is permanently disabled. This means that, in the Automatic Shutdown area, the value
Disable (option not modifiable) is automatically set and the other items of the area are not available.
Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller
before trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto).
Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the
laser during the testing operation.
See also
The tab displays the status of the transport of the SOH bytes on a Radio E1 channel.
Parameters
Radio E1 Selection. High priority Radio E1 channel (Permanent) currently used for the transport of the SOH frame in radio:
Permanent 1A <Radio E1 number>. The transport of the bytes of the SOH frame on
the specific Permanent E1 channel of the Radio 1A.
Permanent 2A <Radio E1 number>. The transport of the bytes of the SOH frame on
the specific Permanent E1 channel of the Radio 2A.
Not Selected. The transport in radio of the SOH frame is not active.
None available. Radio not available (radio unequipped or in failure) or the number of
Permanent channels is set to 0.
See also
Verify/modify the transport status of the bytes of SOH frame on an E1 Radio channel
257
VC-4
WARNING Command not available if the STM-1 Bulk function is active for the specific STM-1 (see STM1
Bulk Config.).
Lim A VC-4 [x]. It manages the specific VC-4 virtual container configuration.
The x value indicates the STM-1 which the command is referred to (1, 2).
258
The Lim A VC-4 [2] command is available only if the management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST
mode).
The x value indicates the STM-1 which the command is referred to (1, 2).
The Lim A VC-4 [x] command manages the specific VC-4 virtual container configuration.
Operations
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x].
The Type parameter indicates the enabling status of the overhead J1 byte used for the control of the
received signal:
16 Bytes Control. The control of the J1 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte.
The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal (J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x].
The tab displays the sequence of characters in transmission and/or reception relevant to the byte J1,
used for the control of the received signal:
2. To change the parameter, type a new string of ASCII characters into the box:
259
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x].
The Alarms area displays, for each VC-4 alarm, a box containing the alarm name.
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major,
Minor, Warning severity.
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x].
2. Select the B3/Signal Label tab.
The B3 Signal Degrade Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm
according to the error degree calculated on the byte B3 of the received signal:
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x].
2. Select the B3/Signal Label tab.
The B3 Excessive BER Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B3 of the received signal:
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x].
2. Select the B3/Signal Label tab.
The Signal Label area displays the setting of the value of Signal Label (byte C2) used for the control of
the received signal:
260
Sent. Specification which the transmitted value of Signal Label refers to.
Expected. Specification which the received value of Signal Label refers to.
The mismatch between expected value and received value generates an alarm (VC-4 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm).
3. To change the parameter, set in the box:
Sent Label. The specification which the value of the transmitted C2 byte refers to.
Expected Label. The specification which the value of the expected C2 byte refers to.
The specifications which can be set, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec., are: Path Unequipped, TUG Structure.
4. Press Apply and then confirm.
261
J1/Alarms tab
The tab displays the configuration of the specific VC-4 virtual container (J1 Trace Identifier configuration
and VC-4 alarms).
Parameters
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
See also
262
Sent (Signal Label). Specification which the transmitted value of Signal Label refers to. The
specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, TUG Structure.
Expected (Signal Label). Specification which the received value of Signal Label refers to. The
specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, TUG Structure.
Received (Signal Label). Specification which the received signal refers to. The specifications,
according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, TUG Structure.
See also
263
VC-12
WARNING Command not available if the STM-1 Bulk function is active for the specific STM-1 (see STM1
Bulk Config.).
264
VC-12 Thresholds
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the management of STM-1 is active (see Configurator) and the STM1 Bulk function is not active for the specific STM-1 (see STM1 Bulk Config.).
The VC-12 Thresholds command manages the thresholds of some VC-12 alarms.
Operations
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > VC-12 Thresholds.
The Signal Degrade Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm:
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > VC-12 Thresholds.
The Excessive BER Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the VC-12 Excessive BER alarm:
265
Push-button
266
The Lim A VC-12 [2] command is available only if the management of two unprotected STM-1 is active
(MST mode).
The x value indicates the STM-1 which the command is referred to (1, 2).
The Lim A VC-12 [x] command manages the configuration parameter of each VC-12 channel.
Operations
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > Lim A VC-12 [x].
The Lim A VC-12 contextual area displays the alarms status of the VC-12.
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > Lim A VC-12 [x].
2. Select the wished VC-12 channel.
The Status parameter indicates the enabling status of the byte J2 used for the control of the received
signal:
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > Lim A VC-12 [x].
2. Select the wished VC-12 channel.
The J2 Path Trace area displays the sequence of characters in transmission and/or reception relevant
to the byte J2 used for the control of the received signal:
267
3. To change the parameter, type a new string of ASCII characters into the box:
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > Lim A VC-12 [x].
2. Select the wished VC-12 channel.
The Signal Label area displays the setting of the value of Signal Label (byte C2) used for the control of
the received signal:
Sent. Specification which the value of the transmitted byte C2 refers to.
Expected. Specification which the value of the expected byte C2 refers to.
The mismatch between expected value and received value generates an alarm (VC-12 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm).
3. To change the parameter, set in the Sent and Expected box the new specification.
The specifications which can be set, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, Asynchronous.
4. Press Apply and then confirm.
268
Each VC-12 is represented by a box and by the number of the channel reported into the box.
The position of the box identifies the TUG-3 and the TUG-2 which the VC-12 belongs to.
To verify the channel configuration (J2 Trace Identifier and Signal Label) select the wished VC12. The detail of the configuration is pointed out in Lim A VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window.
VC-12 alarms
The total status of the channel alarms is displayed by the colour of the box:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
If there are more alarms with different severity, the colour of the box will point out the most
serious alarm present in the VC-12 channel.
To verify the alarms of a single channel, select the wished VC-12 channel. The detail of the
alarms is pointed out in Lim A VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window.
Push-button
Status (J2 Path Trace). Enabling status of the byte J2 used for the control of the received signal:
Sent (J2 Path Trace). Transmitted sequence of the control characters (byte J2).
Expected (J2 Path Trace). Character sequence to be controlled at reception (byte J2).
Received (J2 Path Trace). Character sequence in reception (byte J2).
Sent (Signal Label). Specification which the transmitted value of Signal Label (byte C2) refers
to. The specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, Asynchronous.
Expected (Signal Label). Specification which the received value of Signal Label (byte C2) refers
to. The specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, Asynchronous.
Alarms. Status of VC-12 channel alarms. For each alarm there is a box containing the alarm
name. The colour of the box indicates the alarm status:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
Push-button
269
270
Cross Connection
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment that manage the matrix (see Tab.12).
PWE3
function
Matrix
Notes
Not
available
Not
available
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
Not
available
Available
Disable
Available
Enable
Available
Not
available
Not
available
Not
available
Not
available
Disable
Available
Enable
Not
available
(2)
(1)
(2)
See Configurator
271
Cross Connection
WARNING Chapter meaningful only for equipment managing the TDM matrix and with PWE3 function not
CONNECTIONS
272
Channel, Linked Channel 1 and Linked Channel 2. Channels composing the connection:
E1 (Exp + Base) <E1 number>. E1 channel of the base (Trib. A and B) and expansion.
Radio <radio branch> Perm. E1... <E1 number>. High priority Radio E1 channel of the
specific radio direction.
Radio <radio branch> Extra E1 <E1 number>. Low priority Radio E1 channel of the specific radio direction.
Remember that the connection is a bidirectional path. The table considers a possible direction
of the connection (Channel -> Linked Channel) only for clarity of explanation.
The column Linked Channel 2 is meaningful only for the protected Tributary- Radio connections.
Actions > Delete All. Delete all the connections present in the list.
273
The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.
274
The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.
In the Cross-Connection Matrix window, select a channel of the connection you wish to delete
and drag-and-drop it over the trash icon or select Options > Delete connections.
If the connection is of type:
Protected Tributary-Radio and one of the Radio E1 channel has been moved to the trash:
only the connection side, which the selected Radio E1 belongs to, is deleted.
Protected Tributary-Radio and the channel Tributary VC-12/E1 has been moved to the
trash: the whole connection is deleted.
One or more connections, select its rows. Select Actions > Delete and confirm.
All the connections in the list, select Actions > Delete All and confirm.
275
Disable an Auto-Loop
Access | Read & Write
Select the tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or on the radio channel (E1
Permanent/E1 Extra) with auto-loop enabled (light blue box) for which you wish to disable the
auto-loop.
Select Options > Auto Loop > Delete.
Press Apply and confirm.
The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.
One or more Auto-Loops, select its rows. Select the Actions > Delete command and
confirm.
All the list, select the Actions > Delete All command and confirm.
276
6. Press OK.
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.
Active Link Alarms / Protection Alarms. Respectively status of the alarms of the active connection and of the StandBy connection.
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical,
Major, Minor, Warning severity.
Manual Switch (Preferential). Modality used to manage the preferential connection function for
the service:
Auto. In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) a connection is not used in preferential mode.
Radio 1A <E1 radio>.In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) the connection with
the E1 on radio side 1A pointed out by the option is used as preferential.
Radio 2A <E1 radio>. In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) the connection with
the E1 on radio side 2A pointed out by the option is used as preferential.
Forced Switch. Modality used to manage the switch between active and stand-by connections:
Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal
operating modality of the equipment).
Radio 1A <E1 radio>. The equipment is forced to use for the operation the connection
with the E1 on radio side 1A pointed out by the option.
Radio 2A <E1 radio>. The equipment is forced to use for the operation the connection
with the E1 on radio side 2A pointed out by the option.
Wait to Restore Time. Time during which a no-alarm condition must persist on the preferential
connection so that the service is restored on it.
Modify the modality used to manage the switch in the protected connection
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
277
Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operating modality of the equipment).
Radio 1A <E1 radio>. The equipment is forced to use for the operation the connection with the
E1 on radio side 1A pointed out by the option.
Radio 2A <E1 radio>. The equipment is forced to use for the operation the connection with the
E1 on radio side 2A pointed out by the option.
5. Press Set.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Radio 1A or Radio 2A option) a message warns
that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on
again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.
Auto. In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) a connection is not used in preferential
mode.
Radio 1A <E1 radio>.In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) the connection with the E1
on radio side 1A pointed out by the option is used as preferential.
Radio 2A <E1 radio>. In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) the connection with the E1
on radio side 2A pointed out by the option is used as preferential.
5. Press Set.
Force the switch on preferential connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
Access | Read & Write
278
When a configuration value is selected for the Radio E1s of an area, the system automatically assigns
the same value even to the Radio E1s present on the other side of the connection and vice versa.
5. Press Set.
279
A tributary channel (E1/VC-12) and an E1 radio connected by a blue line, the connection is of
type unprotected Tributary-Radio.
A tributary channel (E1/VC-12) and an E1 radio connected by a blue line, the same tributary
channel and a different E1 radio connected by a pink line, the connection is of type protected
Tributary-Radio.
The colour of the lines indicates the status of the switch. The active connection is pointed out
by the blue line, while the stand-by one by the pink line.
Two different radio channel connected by an orange line, the connection is of type Pass
Through.
Two different tributary channel (E1/VC-12) connected by a blue line, the connection is of type
Tributary-Tributary.
The same tributary channel (E1/VC-12) with a blue line linking the channel itself, the connection
is of Auto-Loop type.
The same radio channel with a blue line linking the channel itself, the connection is of AutoLoop type.
Fig.7 shows the description of all the elements present in the Cross Connection Matrix window.
280
1
2a
2b
2c
(1)
MENU bar.
File > Close. Close the window.
Options > Delete Connection. Delete one or more connections.
Options > Auto loop > Add. Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop).
Options > Auto Loop > Delete. Disable an Auto-Loop.
List > List. Display the connections of the equipment in table format.
(2)
CHANNELS area. This area displays the (tributary and radio) channels provided on the equipment
and grouped by membership streams.
Every channel is represented by a box.
For the E1 channels, the channel number is pointed out in the box.
For the VC-12 channels (Expansion STM-1) the TU12 number is pointed out in the box while the
position of the box identifies the TUG3 and the TUG2 of membership of VC-12.
The status of use of the channel is represented by the colour of the box (see note 5). The currently
selected channel is represented by the light grey.
When a yellow led is present into a box of a tributary channel (E1/VC-12), this means that this channel is used for a connection of Tributary-Radio type.
The streams displayed in this area change according to the settings made by the user in the Visualization Mode area (see note 3).
In the Visualization Mode area, if the selected option is:
Tributary-Radio. The Channels area contains two different radio stream ad one tributary
streams.
The top part displays the radio stream pointed out in the 2a box. The bottom part displays
the radio stream pointed out in the 2c box.
The middle part displays the tributary stream pointed out in the 2b box.
281
To change a stream, select the specific box and select the new stream from the list.
The value set in the box 2a will not be available in the list of values of box 2c and vice versa.
In the Channels area, the order used to display the Extra E1 Radio depends on the priority
defined by the user (see BW & Mod./Link ID).
Exp xE1+ Base. E1 channel of the base (Trib. A and B) and expansion.
The availability of the above mentioned values depends on the type of equipment and on the
equipped tributary streams (see Tab.13).
In the boxes on the radio stream the following values can be present:
Radio 1A Permanent... E1(<radio label>). High priority E1 channels of the Radio 1A.
Radio 2A Permanent... E1(<radio label>). High priority E1 channels of the Radio 2A.
The Radio 2A value are available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
When an used channel is selected, the connection is displayed represented by a blue line with a
yellow rectangle next where the connection name is reported.
If two lines, one blue (active connection) and one pink (stand-by connection) end to the same tributary channel, this means that the channel is used for a protected connection.
If the user moves the pointer over a channel used for an Auto Loop or for a connection and at least
one of the (radio/tributary) streams involved by the connection is not displayed in the channel area,
the Channel Legend and Link Legend areas are replaced by an area where the connections existing
among channels are dynamically displayed.
A connection is named, at its creation, with the name DEFAULT. The default name can be modified
by the user.
(3)
Visualization Mode area. The parameters present in the Visualization Mode area determine the
streams displayed in the channels area. If the selected option is:
Tributary-Radio. The Channels area contains two different radio stream ad one tributary
streams.
If the equipment is not equipped with the radio, the option Tributary-Radio will not be available in
Visualization Mode area, because there are not available E1 Radio channels to realize Tributary-Radio or Pass Through cross-connections.
282
(4)
(5)
Channel Legend area. This area displays the colours that determines the status of the channels:
Light purple (Assigned). The channel is used for a Tributary-Tributary, Pass Through or Tributary-Radio connection executed on the equipment (real connection).
Light blue (Auto loop). The channel is used for an Auto-Loop executed on the equipment (real
Auto-Loop).
Dark grey (Delete Request). The connection that used the considered channel has been deleted. The apply command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been transmitted yet to
the equipment (connection deletion requested).
Blue (Assign Request).The channel has been selected for a Tributary-Tributary, Pass
Through or Tributary-Radio connection. The apply command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been transmitted to the equipment yet (connection requested).
Dark green (Auto Loop-Req). The channel has been selected for an Auto-Loop. The apply
command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been transmitted to the equipment yet
(Auto-Loop requested).
Very dark grey (Unavailable). The channel is used for the transport of the SOH bytes of the
STM-1. If the box contains:
[1]
. The channel is used for the transport of SOH bytes of the first STM-1.
[2]
. The channel is used for the transport of SOH bytes of the second STM-1.
(7)
Blue (Active Connection). The blue line indicates the connection currently used.
Pink (Stand-by Connection). The pink line indicates, for the protected connections, the unused connection.
Orange (Pass Through). The orange line indicates the Pass Through connection.
Push-buttons area:
Refresh. Update the data present in the window: all the changes made to the connections
and not made effective yet are lost.
Ok. The window is closed and all the changes made to the connections and not confirmed yet (selection of Apply push-button) are lost.
283
TDM matrix
Tab.12 lists the ALCplus2e equipment provided with the TDM matrix for the cross connection of the E1
channels with the Radio E1 channels.
Connection Type
The TDM matrix manages the following types of connection:
Unprotected Tributary-Radio. Single connection between a tributary channel (E1 base-expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) and a Radio E1 (Radio Permanent E1/Radio Extra E1).
In case of equipment without radio the connection is not available.
Pass Through. Single connection between two different E1 Radio channels (Radio Permanent E1/
Radio Extra E1).
In case of equipment without radio the connection is not available.
Tributary-Tributary. Single connection between two different tributary channels (E1 base-expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS).
Auto-Loop. Loop of a tributary channel (E1 base-expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or a Radio E1
channel (Radio Permanent E1/Radio Extra E1) on itself.
If the equipment is in 2x(1+0) radio configuration the TDM matrix manages also the connection:
Protected Tributary-Radio. Connection between a tributary channel (E1 base-expansion/VC-12
STM-1/E1 NBUS) and one E1 of a radio direction (for instance, Radio 1A Permanent E1 or Radio 1A
Extra E1) and a second connection (acting as protection) between the same tributary channel and
one E1 of the other radio direction (for instance, Radio 2A Permanent E1 or Radio 2A Extra E1).
WARNING If a protected NBUS channel is used for a connection (Tributary-Tributary or Tributary-Radio),
the protection connection for this connection is automatically realized by the matrix.
The protected Nodal Bus is available in ALCplus2e equipment in protected nodal configuration (see Configurator).
E1 channels
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the type of equipment and
on the equipped tributary streams (see Tab.13).
284
IDUBOARD
Port
Stream
Expansion STM-1
(1)
Configuration
Availability
E1
Always available
STM-1
63 VC-12 channels
x E1
Radio 1A Permanent E1 Radio 1A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(2)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 1A)
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)
Port
Stream
E1
FUNCTION DISABLE)
Configuration
E1 of the base (tributary A
and B) + 16 E1 of the expansion
x E1
Radio 1A Permanent E1 Radio 1A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(2)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 1A)
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)
y E1
Port/channels available when the
y = Value of the parameter equipment is provided with radio
TDM Capacity relevant to and the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 1A) (3)
DISABLE)
Availability
Always available
y E1
Port/channels available when the
y = Value of the parameter equipment is provided with radio
TDM Capacity relevant to and the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 1A) (3)
Stream
Expansion STM-1
(1)
Configuration
Availability
E1
Always available
STM-1
63 VC-12 channels
x E1
Radio 1A Permanent E1 Radio 1A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(2)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 1A)
285
Port
Stream
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)
Configuration
y E1
Port/channels available when the
y = Value of the parameter equipment is provided with radio
TDM Capacity relevant to and the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 1A) (3)
x E1
Radio 2A Permanent E1 Radio 2A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(4)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 2A)
Radio 2A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 2A
(low priority E1
channels)
Availability
Port/channels available in
2x(1+0) radio configuration and
the value x is greater than 0
y E1
Port/channels available in
y = Value of the parameter 2x(1+0) radio configuration and
TDM Capacity relevant to the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 2A) (3)
Stream
Configuration
Availability
E1
Always available
STM-1
63 VC-12 channels
NBUS
Nodal Bus
x E1
Radio 1A Permanent E1 Radio 1A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(2)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 1A)
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)
y E1
Port/channels available when the
y = Value of the parameter equipment is provided with radio
TDM Capacity relevant to and the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 1A) (3)
Stream
Configuration
E1
Always available
STM-1
63 VC-12 channels
NBUS
Nodal Bus
x E1
Radio 1A Permanent E1 Radio 1A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(2)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 1A)
286
Availability
Port
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Stream
Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)
Configuration
y E1
Port/channels available when the
y = Value of the parameter equipment is provided with radio
TDM Capacity relevant to and the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 1A) (3)
x E1
Radio 2A Permanent E1 Radio 2A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(4)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 2A)
Radio 2A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 2A
(low priority E1
channels)
Availability
Port/channels available in
2x(1+0) radio configuration and
the value x is greater than 0
y E1
Port/channels available in
y = Value of the parameter 2x(1+0) radio configuration and
TDM Capacity relevant to the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 2A) (3)
Stream
E1
Configuration
E1 of the base (tributary A
and B) + 16 E1 of the expansion
x E1
Radio 1A Permanent E1 Radio 1A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(2)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 1A)
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)
Radio 2A
(low priority E1
channels)
Always available
y E1
Port/channels available when the
y = Value of the parameter equipment is provided with radio
TDM Capacity relevant to and the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 1A) (3)
x E1
Radio 2A Permanent E1 Radio 2A
1...63 (<radio label>) (high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma(4)
nent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 2A)
Radio 2A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Availability
Port/channels available in
2x(1+0) radio configuration and
the value x is greater than 0
y E1
Port/channels available in
y = Value of the parameter 2x(1+0) radio configuration and
TDM Capacity relevant to the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 2A) (3)
(1)
If the management of two STM-1 is active, the values Expansion STM-1 [1] and Expansion STM-1 [2]
will be available, which respectively point out VC-12 channels of the first and of the second STM-1.
WARNING The STM-1 is not available if the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.).
(2)
If more than 63 high priority E1 channels are set, in addition to the value Radio 1A Permanent E1 1...63
(<radio label>) (E1 channels 163) will be available the value Radio 1A Permanent E1 64...80 (<radio
label>) (E1 channels 6480).
(3)
The order used to display the Radio Extra E1 channels depends on the priority defined by the user
(see BW & Mod./Link ID).
(4)
If more than 63 high priority E1 channels are set, in addition to the value Radio 2A Permanent E1 1...63
(<radio label>) (E1 channels 163) will be available the value Radio 2A Permanent E1 64...80 (<radio
label>) (E1 channels 6480).
287
TDM nodal
bus
protection
No Nodal
Nodal
(1)
NBUS port
Stream
Configuration
Nodal Bus 1
NBUS 1 [64126]
NBUS 2 [163]
63 E1 channels (64126)
Nodal Bus 2
NBUS 2 [64126]
Protected
(1)
63 E1 channels (163)
63 E1 channels (163)
63 E1 channels (64126)
NBUS 1 [163]
63 protected E1 channels
(2)
NBUS 2 [163]
63 protected E1 channels
(3)
Node Type: Nodal - Nbr of TDM Elements: value different from No Element (see Configurator).
(2)
The first group of 63 E1 channels (163) of the Nodal Bus 1 is protected by the second group of 63 E1
channels (64126) of the Nodal Bus 2. The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group
(E1-1) is protected by the first channel of the second group (E1-64); the second channel of the first group
(E1-2) is protected by the second channel of the second group (E1-65) and so on.
(3)
The first group of 63 E1 channels (163) of the Nodal Bus 2 is protected by the second group of 63 E1
channels (64126) of the Nodal Bus 1. The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group
(E1-1) is protected by the first channel of the second group (E1-64); the second channel of the first group
(E1-2) is protected by the second channel of the second group (E1-65) and so on.
288
Execute a connection.
Disable an Auto-Loop.
Creation of a cross-connection
All the connections in the TDM matrix must be created by the user (see Execute an unprotected TributaryRadio connection, Execute a protected Tributary-Radio connection, Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection, Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop).
It is possible to create a connection only in the graphical display (Cross Connection Matrix window).
STM-1 configuration change (STM-1 MST Mode parameter - see Configurator). Passage from
the:
1+0, 1+1 MSP, 2 x (1+0) MST or 1+1 MSP No ALS option to the None.
2 x (1+0) MST option to the 1+0, 1+1 MSP or 1+1 MSP No ALS.
Node Type parameter. Passage from the Nodal option to the No Nodal.
TDM Nodal Bus Protection parameter (node). Passage from the Not Protected option to
the Protected (only connection on NBUS 1 [64126] and NBUS 2 [64126] ports).
Radio configuration change (Radio parameter - see Configurator). Passage from the:
When the alarm monitoring for the 2Mbit/s signals is activated through PDH and SDH rings (see Configurator), if the TDM matrix does not contain any protected Tributary-Radio connections, the existing connections are not deleted.
Otherwise, if at least one protected Tributary-radio connection is present, all the connections are deleted.
289
290
Radio E1 Framing
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment in one of the following configurations:
Radio configuration 1+0, 1+1 Hot Standby or 1+1 Freq. Div., with the management of STM-1
active and with the transport of the PDH alarms in the SDH frame enabled (see Configurator).
The Radio E1 Framing command manages the structure of the Radio E1s.
Operations
Set All E1 As Framed and confirm. The specific E1 Radio group is configured with the framed
structure.
Set All E1 As Unframed and confirm. The specific E1 Radio group is configured with the unframed structure.
291
Radio 1A - Permanent E1. Structure of E1 Radio assigned permanently (high priority streams)
to the Radio 1A.
Area available when the equipment is provided with radio and the Permanent TDM Traffic parameter is greater than 0 (see BW & Mod./Link ID).
Radio 1A - Extra E1. Structure of E1 Radio (low priority) to the Radio 1A.
Area available when the equipment is provided with radio and the parameter TDM Capacity relevant to the ACM profile with the highest number of E1, is greater than 0.
Radio 2A - Permanent E1. Structure of E1 Radio assigned permanently (high priority streams)
to the Radio 2A.
Area available when the equipment is in 2x(1+0) radio configuration and the Permanent TDM
Traffic parameter is greater than 0.
Radio 2A - Extra E1. Structure of E1 Radio (low priority) to the Radio 2A.
Area available when the equipment is in 2x(1+0) radio configuration and the parameter TDM
Capacity relevant to the ACM profile with the highest number of E1, is greater than 0.
Status. In every area, the parameter indicates the number of available specific Radio E1. For
every channel, the:
Inactive box (
Active box (
Push-button
292
RADIO
293
Radio Branch
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with the radio.
For the equipment in 1+0 configuration is present the Radio Branch 1A command. For the equipment in
1+1 or 2x(1+0) configuration are present the Radio Branch 1A (branch 1 radio parameters) and Radio
Branch 2A (branch 2 radio parameters) commands.
The Radio Branch command manages the radio parameters.
Operations
In 1+1 Hot Standby or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done
also on the other branch.
1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
The Frequency/Channel selection parameter indicates the RF channel expressed as channel number
and relevant frequency.
The wording:
Channel Not Set indicates that for the specific radio a channel is not planned.
Hardware Failure indicates a hardware problem. E.g. check that the connection cable between
the IDU and the ODU is not failure or missing.
294
The permanent switch-off of the transmitter (option Permanent Off) is NOT a maintenance operation, so
the selection of this value is not subjected to the Timeout of MAN OP and the setting is not lost after a
controller restart.
1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
The Tx Transmitter parameter indicates the operation of the transmitter:
295
Only if you are switching off the RT (selection of the Off option) a message warns that you are executing
a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The deactivation of the RT power supply activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched
off and, then, switched on, the power supply of RT is active, independently from the previous setting.
Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).
In this condition, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (Max Ptx cursor).
296
High: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted power
when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set threshold
value.
Low: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted power
when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set threshold value.
3. To change the threshold move the High and/or Low cursor to the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
297
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter
RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.
298
Settings tab. Radio parameters: RF channel, measurements resolutions, carrier only, Tx transmitter and RT PSU.
Powers tab. Radio parameters: ATPC.
Push-button
Settings tab
The tab displays the radio parameters (RF channel, measurements resolutions, carrier only, Tx transmitter
and RT PSU).
Parameters
Channel Not Set indicates that for the specific radio a channel is not planned.
Hardware Failure indicates a hardware problem. E.g. check that the connection cable
between the IDU and the ODU is not failure or missing.
Measurements Resolution. Resolution of the power received (Prx) and transmitted (Ptx):
Ptx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted by the
equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated Ptx
value corresponds to 10 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the
changing of the transmitted power when the Ptx gets a value < 8 or > 12.
Prx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated PRx
value corresponds to -70 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the
changing of the transmitted power when the PRx gets a value <-72 or > -68.
299
See also
Powers tab
The tab displays the radio parameters (ATPC).
Parameters
Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).
Max Ptx <current value> dBm. Maximum output power value at the transmitter. The parameter affects the ATPC device as when it is in manual functioning mode as in automatic one.
ATPC Regulation <current value> dB. Range of the ATPC regulation (expressed in dB) with
respect to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper limit of the
range.
Parameter available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Reference Modulation Tx Power Control parameter - Automatic value).
Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx. ATPC thresholds:
High: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than
the set threshold value
Low: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted
power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the
set threshold value.
Current ATPC Power. The table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every ACM
profile.
Every table row corresponds to a profile. For every profile is displayed in the column:
Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter
RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.
Push-button
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC (Reference Modulation Tx Power Control)
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx)
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation (ATPC Regulation)
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device (Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local
PRx)
300
MAINTENANCE
Lan Statistics. It manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying all the counters of
packets/bytes in input/output, subdivided by single port.
Lan Stat. Summary. It manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying, at the same
time, the main counters of packets/bytes in input/output for each port.
OAM. It manages the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
S/N Meas. It displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N).
PRBS. It manages the PRBS device.
Radio Loop. It manages the radio loops.
Radio Switch. It manages the radio switch.
301
Lan Statistics
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
The Lan Statistics command manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying all the
counters of packets/bytes in input/output, subdivided by single port.
The count of a counter is cyclic and always active.
The depth of the events stored by each counter is equal to 2^32: when this limit is reached, the count
restarts from zero. In any moment, you can reset all the counters.
Counters are compliant to specification RFC 2819 except for the counter Byte Received which does not include the bytes belonging to packets with size over the Max Packet Size.
Operations
302
Active ( ). The results are divided by 1.000. Next to the counter name, whose result
is divided, the wording (x1000) is displayed.
Dropped Frame. Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the probe
due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets,
as it represents only the number of times that this condition occurred after the exhaustion of
the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other causes.
Total Byte Received. Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received
on the network. This value includes 4 FCS octets.
Total Frame Received. Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets,
and multicast packets) received.
Broadcast Frame Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to the
broadcast address. This does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Frame Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to a
multicast address. This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
CRC Align Errors. Total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and n
(parameter Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets with bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a no-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Frame. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and
were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Frame. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max
Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets and were otherwise well formed.
Fragments. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had
either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a
bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet Size,
it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets, and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with
an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a no-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this EthLannet segment.
Frame 64 Oct.[Sent+Received]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received
and transmitted that were 64 octets in length.
Frame 65 to 127 Oct.[Sent+Received]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive.
Frame 128 to 255 Oct.[Sent+Received]. Total number of packets (including bad packets)
received and transmitted that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive.
303
Frame 256 to 511 Oct.[Sent+Received]. Total number of packets (including bad packets)
received and transmitted that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive.
Frame 512 to 1023 Oct.[Sent+Received]. Total number of packets (including bad packets)
received and transmitted that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive.
Frame 1024 to max pck size [Sent+Received]. Total number of transmitted and received
packets with a length greater than 1024 octets (incorrect packets included).
Late Collisions. Evaluation relevant to the total number of collisions detected in this EthLannet
segment, after the transmission of more than 512 bits from the beginning of TXEnable.
Valid Byte Received. Total number of received bytes relevant to correct packets. This counter
is increased once for every data octet of good packets (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received.
Byte Sent. Number of transmitted bytes. This counter is increased once for every data octet of
a transmitted good packet.
Valid Frame Received. Number of received correct frames. This counter is increased once for
every good packet (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received.
Frame Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every transmitted good packet.
Out Multicast Frame. Number of Multicast frames sent. This counter does not include Broadcast packets.
Out Broadcast Frame. Number of Broadcast frames sent.
Out Unicast Frame. Number of Unicast frames sent. This is given by: Frame Sent - Out Multicast Frame - Out Broadcast Frame.
In Pause Frame. Number of good Flow Control frames received.
Out Pause Frame. Number of Flow Control frames sent.
Push-button
304
The Lan Stat. Summary command manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying, at
the same time, the main counters of packets/bytes in input/output for every port.
The count of a counter is cyclic and always active.
The depth of the events stored by each counter is equal to 2^32: when this limit is reached, the count
restarts from zero. In any moment, you can reset all the counters.
Counters are compliant to specification RFC 2819 except for the counter Byte Received which does not include the bytes belonging to packets with size over the Max Packet Size.
Operations
305
Byte Received (Total Byte Received). Total number of octets of data (including those
in bad packets) received on the network. This value includes 4 FCS octets.
Frame Received (Total Frame Received). Total number of packets (including bad
packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received.
Byte Sent. Number of transmitted bytes. This counter is increased once for every data
octet of a transmitted good packet.
Frame Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every
transmitted good packet.
Dropped Frame. Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by
the probe due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number
of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition
occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded
also for other causes.
CRC Err. (CRC Align Errors). Total number of packets received that had a length of
between 64 and n (parameter Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets
with bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error)
or a bad FCS with a no-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3, Lan 4, Port A, Port B. Value of the counters with respect to every single
port of the Ethernet Switch.
The value of each counter refer to the moment when the context is opened or updated.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.11).
The presence, next to the name of a port, of the wording:
(Brx), indicates that the Spanning Tree protocol is enabled for the specific port. The
value x indicates the Bridge which it belongs to.
(Elpx), indicates that the Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment)
is enabled for the specific port (only LANs). The value x indicates the protection
group.
(ElpNx), indicates that the Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node) is enabled
for the specific port (only LANs). The value x indicates the protection group.
(Trkx), indicates that the Trunking mode is enabled for the specific port (only LANs).
The value x indicates the aggregation group.
Push-button
306
OAM
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the ETH OAM Functionality is enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. By means of local program WEB LCT, one or more
features can be enabled.
The OAM command manages the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment, the maintenance points of the OAMFM Domain, which the equipment belongs to, and allows monitoring the path of a service instance (VLAN)
by using the Continuity Check (CCM), LoopBack (LBM) and Link Trace (LTM) messages.
Operations
OAM-FM DOMAIN
Verify the characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment
Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment
Remove the OAM-FM Domain of equipment
WARNING ALCplus2e equipment manages a single Domain. The name or the level of an
OAM-FM Domain associated to equipment cannot be modified. To change one or both the
parameters, it is necessary to remove the current Domain and to define a new one.
MAINTENANCE POINTS
Verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality
Associate a MA to a VLAN
Associate a MEP to a VLAN
Remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN
WARNING The definition of a MIP takes place after the definition of the MA. In fact, the
definition of a MA in a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic
definition of a MIP for every Switch port which the specific VLAN is enabled for.
CCM
MESSAGES MANAGEMENT
TABLE
AND
LTM
MESSAGES MANAGEMENT
307
tivated (Ingress Filtering Check parameter- value different from Disable 802-1Q).
1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Into the Domain box, type the OAM-FM Domain name of the equipment (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters).
3. Into the Level box, type a number between 0 and 7 according to the priority level you wish to assign
to the OAM-FM Domain (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
4. Press Create and confirm.
The equipment is associated to the set OAM-FM Domain.
In the contextual area, the OAM-FM MA/MEP table is displayed.
Verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if the OAM-FM Domain has been defined for the equipment.
308
Associate a MA to a VLAN
Access | Read & Write
WARNING ALCplus2e equipment manages a MA for every single VLAN.
A MA can be associated to a VLAN even during the creation of a MEP (see Associate a MEP to a VLAN).
The definition of a MA for a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic definition
of a MIP for every Switch port which the specific VLAN is enabled for.
1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Select the VLAN which you wish to associate the MA to.
3. Press Bind MA.
4. Set, in the MA Name box, the name you wish to assign to the Maintenance Association (alphanumeric
string of minimum 1 and maximum 15 characters).
The system suggests, in the box, the name of the VLAN to which you are assigning the MA. This name
can be changed at ones wish.
5. Press Ok and confirm.
In the OAM-FM MA/MEP table, for the selected VLAN, the MA just created is pointed out (MA Name column).
32.
1. Select Maintenance > OAM.
2. Select the VLAN which you wish to associate the MEP to.
A MEP can be associated to a VLAN which a MA has not been associated to yet or to a VLAN which a
MA is already associated to. In this last case, the port of the Ethernet Switch which the MEP will be
associated to, will be automatically converted from intermediate maintenance point (MIP) to end maintenance point (MEP).
3. Press Bind MEP.
4. Set, in the box MEP Id, the identifying number you wish to assign to MEP (value between 1 and 8191).
The system suggests, in the box, the identifying number of the VLAN which you are assigning the MEP
to. This value can be changed at ones wish.
The identifying number of MEP must be univocal in the network for every specific VLAN.
5. Set, in the box MA Name, the name you wish to assign to the MA which MEP belongs to (alphanumeric
string of minimum 1 and maximum 15 characters).
The system suggests, in the box, the name of the VLAN which you are assigning the MEP to. This name
can be changed at ones wish.
If a MA has been already assigned to the VLAN (see Associate a MA to a VLAN), the parameter will be
already set and cannot be changed.
6. Set, in the box CCM Interval, the time interval used for the transmission of the continuity check messages (CCM):
1s. 1 second.
1m. 1 minute.
10m. 10 minutes.
Remember that, for a correct operation of the continuity check, the set CCM interval must be the same
for the MEPs of the same VLAN.
7. Set, in the box LAN(s), the Ethernet port where you wish to map the MEP.
The description of the values the same depicted for the OAM-FM MA/MEP table.
309
The ports of the Ethernet Switch not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of
the specific VLAN cannot be selected (disabled port).
If the equipment if an Ethernet element of a node, the LAN 1 and LAN 2, even if enabled to the transit
of the packets, cannot be selected because not available for the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
8. Set, in the box Direction, the direction where you wish to send the CCM messages:
Up ( ). CCM messages are sent, as they were in input from the considered port, to the other
Switch ports involved by the considered VLAN.
Down (
Modify the time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only if a MEP is associated to the VLAN.
310
1s. 1 second.
1m. 1 minute.
10m. 10 minutes.
311
means that the considered remote MEP has raised or has contribute to raise the alarm because one of
its configuration parameters (Domain name, MA name or CCM interval) is different from the corresponding parameter set for the local MEP.
Align the configuration of remote MEP with that of the local MEP and repeat this procedure to enable
the remote MEP.
312
5. Set, in the box Messages to Send, the number of LoopBack messages you wish to send (value between1
and 5).
6. Press Run Test and confirm.
During the operation, the box:
Sent Messages displays the progress of the number of sent messages (meaningful if a value different from 1 is set in the box Messages to Send).
Statistics indicates the statistics of the LBRs messages (LoopBack Replies - LBM messages received by the maintenance point as reply to the sent LBM messages) (see LBM tab).
Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of the
same VLAN
WARNING Operation available only if a MEP is associated to the VLAN.
313
0. Lowest priority.
7. Highest priority.
If the fields are empty and available for the setting, this means that no OAM-FM Domain is defined for the equipment.
Push-button
The table shows the status of the VLANs in relation to the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
Every row of the table corresponds to one VLAN.
Parameters
314
If the field has value ---, no MA/MEP is associated to the VLAN (VLAN for which the control of
the service instance is not active).
MEP ID. Identifier of the MEP associated to the VLAN.
If the field has a valid value, a MA and a MEP area associated to the VLAN (VLAN for which the
control of the service instance is active - end maintenance point).
If the field has value ---, no MEP is associated to the VLAN.
CCM Status. Transmission status of CCM messages:
1s. 1 second.
1min. 1 minute.
10min. 10 minutes.
LAN.../Port.... Status of the ports of the Ethernet Switch as regards the transit of packets with
VLan ID equal to that of the VLAN:
----. The port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan.
Tagged. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information:
Of priority; the value is defined in the box Default Priority of the origin port of
the packet itself.
Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the
origin port of the packet.
Untagged. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in output from the port.
Unmodified. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to
that of the virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed
or added to the packets in output from the port.
If a MEP is mapped on a port, the direction where the CCM messages are transmitted is pointed
out:
( ). The CCM messages are sent as they were in input from the considered or to the
other Switch ports involved by the considered VLAN.
). The CCM messages are sent in output from the selected port.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.11).
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the LAN 1 and LAN 2 will not be present as not
available for the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
Push-button
315
RMEP tab
WARNING Tab available only if the selected VLAN has a MEP associated.
Idle. Initial status of the remote MEP just after its manual insertion in table.
Start. Initial status of the remote MEP just after it is manually inserted in the table or
status assumed by the remote MEP after it is enabled (remote MEP manually inserted)
or disabled.
Conn. Status the remote MEP reaches after an enabling command or after the first
CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP.
Failed. Status the remote MEP reaches when local MEP does not receive (along a period of 2,5 times the CCM interval) a CCM message from the specific remote MEP.
The operations the user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Start, Conn. or Failed and
the conditions which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another are depicted
in Fig.9.
RDI State. Alarm status of the remote MEP acquired from the field RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) present in the CCM messages:
LBM tab
WARNING Tab available only if the selected VLAN has a MEP associated.
The tab shows the parameters for the management of LoopBack (LBM) messages.
Parameters
Remote MEP Selection area. This area contains the parameters to set the maintenance point
which the LBM must be transmitted to:
316
Table. Each row of the table represents a remote MEP. For each remote MEP is displayed in the column:
MAC Address. MAC address of the equipment where the remote MEP is present.
State. Status of remote MEP. The description of the status of remote MEP is
the same depicted in Fig.9.
MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment containing the remote maintenance
points.
Use Found MEP. Remote MEP selected in the table present in the Remote MEP
Selection area.
Use MAC Address. Remote MEP or MIP present in the equipment whose physical address is set in MAC Address field.
Test area. This area contains the parameters necessary to set the test execution modality, the
result and the relevant statistics:
Sent Messages. During the test displays the progress of the number of sent messages
(meaningful if a value different from 1 is set in the box Messages to Send).
Statistics. At the end of the test, this area indicates the statistics of the LBRs messages (LoopBack Replies - LBM messages received by the maintenance point as reply
to the sent LBM messages):
Green - OK. Test completed with positive result: the maintenance point has
correctly replied to the LBM messages (OAM-FM packets) sent by the local
MEP.
Red - Failed. Test completed with negative result: the maintenance point has
not correctly replied to the LBM messages (OAM-FM packets) sent by the local
MEP.
Push-button
Run Test. Send one or more LoopBack messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP.
Refresh. Update the context.
The identifier and the name of the selected VLan are dynamically next to the push-buttons, between square brackets.
LTM tab
WARNING Tab available only if the selected VLAN has a MEP associated.
The tab shows the parameters for the management of Link Trace (LTM) messages.
Parameters
Found MEP(s) & Selection area. This area contains the parameters used to set the remote
MEP which the Link Trace messages must be transmitted to:
Table. Each row of the table represents a remote MEP. For each remote MEP is displayed in the column:
MAC Address. MAC address of the equipment where the remote MEP is present.
State. Status of remote MEP. The description of the status of remote MEP is
the same depicted in Fig.9.
317
MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment containing the remote MEP.
Parameter available only if the option Use MAC Address is selected.
Use Found MEP. Remote MEP selected in the table present in the Found MEP(s)
& Selection area.
Use MAC Address. Remote MEP present in the equipment whose physical address is set in the MAC Address field.
Link Trace area. At the end of the operation, the Link Trace area displays the list of the MAC
Addresses of MIP-MEP crossed to reach the remote MEP with the indication of the distance in
Hops from the source MEP:
Table. List with the identifiers of the RMeps which has replied to the LTM message.
Column:
[RMEP] MAC. Type of maintenance point, identifier (only for MEPs) and physical address of the equipment where the maintenance point is present:
Hops. Position of the specific maintenance point with respect to the local MEP:
When the heading of the column is selected, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumerical order with respect to the Hops column and the arrow with
the tip upwards is displayed. On the next selection, the rows are sorted in decreasing
order (the arrow with the tip downwards is displayed) an so on.
Destination MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment containing the remote
MEP.
Push-button
Run Test. Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of
the same VLAN.
Refresh. Update the context.
The identifier and the name of the selected VLan are dynamically next to the push-buttons, between square brackets.
318
ELEMENTS
OAM-FM Domain
MA (Maintenance Association)
MEP (Maintenance End Point)
MIP (Maintenance Intermediate Point)
Remote MEPs
CCM (Continuity Check Message)
LBM (LoopBack Message)
LTM (Link Trace Message)
Example of configuration of a OAM-FM Domain for a set of ALCplus2e equipment
ITU-T Recommendation Y.1731 - OAM Functions and Mechanisms for Ethernet based Networks.
IEEE Standard 802.1ag - IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Virtual
Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault Management.
Define, for each VLAN (service) configured on the equipment, the maintenance points necessary
to diagnostic the connection troubles within a maintenance Domain:
Manage, for every local MEP, the relevant table of Remote MEPs (RMep table).
Manage the Continuity Check Messages (CCM) which allow monitoring end-to-end a service instance (VLAN) pointing out any interruption.
Manage the LoopBack Messages (LBM) which, after the detection of a fault, allow isolating the
point where the fault occurred.
Manage the Link Trace Messages (LTM) which allow tracing the path followed by an OAM-FM
packet between two different MEPs within the same VLAN.
319
OAM-FM Domain
The term OAM-FM Domain defines a network or a part of a network owned and managed by a single entity
(operator) and where the connection troubles can be managed.
The OAM-FM Domain is characterized by a name and a layer.
The name identifies the Domain.
The layer is used to define the hierarchical relationship among Domains. Greatest is the Domain, highest
will be the layer. In fact, the layer corresponds to a value from 0 to 7, where 0 represents the lowest layer
(lowest priority) and 7 the highest layer (higher priority).
All the other entities defined by OAM refer to the Domain: MA, MIP and MEP.
ALCplus2e equipment manages a single OAM-FM Domain.
The OAM-FM Domain must be defined in any equipment you wish to belong to the same OAM-FM maintenance segment (see Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment).
Once an OAM-FM Domain has been defined, its name or layer cannot be changed. To do this, the Domain
must be removed and a new one must be created with the new values.
An OAM-FM Domain cannot be removed if at least one VLAN exists, which one MA has been defined for.
This Domain is transparent as regards the OAM-FM messages with higher priority (messages to/from the
higher Domains), while stops all the messages with lower priority (messages to/from lower Domains).
MA
The term MA (Maintenance Association) identifies the service (VLAN) you wish to monitor.
Then, a Maintenance Association is coupled to a user-defined VLAN; creating a MA means enabling the control of the specified VLAN.
Within a specific OAM-FM Domain, there are as many MAs as the VLANs the user wishes to monitor.
ALCplus2e equipment manages one MA per each VLAN.
On equipment the definition of a MA can be executed by the user, through a specific command (see Associate a MA to a VLAN), or by the system, once the user has defined a MEP (see Associate a MEP to a VLAN).
The definition of a MA in a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic definition
of a MIP per every single port of the Switch which the specific VLAN is enabled for.
Once a MA has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, the MA must be removed from the
VLAN and a new MA must be created with the new values.
The removal of a MA involves even the automatic removal of the MEP, if present, from the VLAN.
MEP
The term MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines the entity, associated to a specific service instance (VLAN),
representing the end point of a MA.
Fig.8 shows an example.
MEP can generate and terminate OAM-FM messages regarding the fault management and the performance
monitoring.
In fact, MEP is the entity set for the control of the service (VLAN) as, within the OAM-FM maintenance segment, the set of MEPs created in the end points of a VLAN allows controlling the correct end to end operation of the VLANs.
The control is achieved by means of the periodic transmission, by each MEP, of the CCM messages and of
the control of the reception of the same messages by the Remote MEPs.
ALCplus2e equipment manages a single MEP per each MA (VLAN) and a maximum of 32 MEPs (32 MA/
VLAN).
MEP must be defined only in ALCplus2e equipment acting as end points of the same VLAN (see Associate
a MEP to a VLAN).
The definition of a MEP for a VLAN involves even the automatic definition of the MA, if this has not been
already done.
320
A numeric identifier, which must be univocal within the network for the specific VLAN.
The time interval used for the transmission of the continuity check messages (CCM).
Once MEP has been created, the transmission of the CCM messages is disabled. They must be
enabled by the user (see Enable/disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP).
The port of the Ethernet Switch, where you wish to map the MEP, and the direction to which you
wish to send the CCMs:
Up ( ). CCM messages are sent, as they were in input from the considered port, to the
other Switch ports involved by the considered VLAN.
Down (
Once a MEP has been defined, its configuration cannot be changed, exception of the interval (see Modify
the time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP). To do this, remove the MEP
from the VLAN and create a new one with the new configuration.
The removal of a MEP involves event the automatic removal of the relevant MA from the VLAN.
ALCplus2e equipment, for every single MEP, manages the following alarms:
MEP Fail - OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Fail Alarm
The alarm becomes active when at least one of the remote MEPs present in the RMep table of
the specific local MEP is in status Start or Failed.
MEP Configuration Mismatch - OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Config.
Mismatch Alarm.
The alarm becomes active when the local MEP receives at least one CCM message, containing
configuration data different from those set for the local MEP itself, from one of the remote MEPs.
With configuration data we mean: Domain name, MA name, CCM interval.
When this alarm is active, the remote MEP, which has raised the alarm, cannot be enabled in
the RMep table.
Fig.8 OAM-FM functionality - Maintenance points
Domain: Test
A.1
MEP 10
Switch
1
2
A
3
4
VLAN Id:20
MA: Vlan 20
A.2
A.3
Switch
1
2
3
4
MIP
A.6
Switch
MEP 11
1
2
A
3
4
A.5
1
2
3
4
Switch
MIP
Switch
1
2
A
3
4
A.4
Switch
1
2
3
4
MEP 12
A.7
Switch
1
2
3
4
MIP
The term MIP (Maintenance Intermediate Point) defines a passive entity, associated to a specific service
instance (VLAN).
MIPs are defined on transit equipment for the monitored VLAN, intermediate among the end MEPs.
Fig.8 shows an example.
321
MIP can reply to the LoopBack (LBM) messages, sent in unicast by a MEP (MAC Address), and to the Link
Trace (LTM) messages, sent by a MEP, but it cannot generate requests of LoopBack and Link Trace towards
other MIP or MEP.
MIP is defined by the operator in ALCplus2e equipment which acts as intermediate points of the same VLAN
and the same OAM-FM maintenance segment.
The definition of a MIP takes place after the definition of the MA (see Associate a MA to a VLAN).
In fact, the definition of a MA within a VLAN for which a MEP is not defined, corresponds to the automatic
definition of a MIP for every single port of the Switch for which the specific VLAN is enabled.
Once a MA/MIP has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, remove the MA/MIP from the
VLAN and create a new one with the new name.
Remote MEPs
The term Remote MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines entities which represent the other end points (remote points) of a VLAN with respect to the local MEP.
Example. Referring to Fig.8, if you are connected by WEB CT to equipment A.1, the local MEP will be MEP
10 while the remote MEPs will be MEP 11 and MEP 12.
Otherwise, if you are connected by WEB CT to equipment A.4, the local MEP will be MEP 11 while the remote MEPs will be MEP 10 and MEP 12.
A table of the remote MEPs (RMep table) is associated to every local MEP (then to every MA/VLAN).
The system records, in this table, the remote MEPs from which the local MEP waits for a CCM message.
If the CCM message does not arrive within a timeout period equal to 2,5 CCM interval set for the local MEP,
the remote MEP is set to status Failed and the relevant alarm is activated (OAM-FM MA: MEP Id: Fail
Alarm).
Example. Referring to Fig.8, if you are connected by WEB CT to equipment A.1, MEP 11 and MEP 12 will
be recorded in the RMep table (relevant to MEP 10).
The transmission of CCM messages is enabled at intervals of 10 sec between a transmission and the next
one.
If, after 25 sec. (2,5 times the CCM interval), MEP 10 does not receive a CCM message, for example from
MEP 11, in the RMep table MEP 11 will be set to status Failed and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Vlan 20 MEP Id:
10 Fail Alarm will be activated, pointing out that a Remote Mep in Failed is present in the RMep table of
the local MEP 10.
The remote MEP remains in status Failed until the local MEP receives a valid CCM message from the remote
MEP or the user removes the remote MEP from the table.
The recording of remote MEPs in the RMep table consists of two parts: the entry in the table and the enabling of the remote MEP (operation necessary so that the remote MEPs are acknowledged as valid end
points by the local MEP).
The entry of MEP in the table takes place:
a. AUTOMATICALLY, after the reception of the first CCM sent by a remote MEP.
For these remote MEPs, the table indicates the identifier of the remote MEP and the MAC Address
of the equipment which the remote MEP belongs to.
The enabling for this type of remote MEPs must be executed manually by the operator (see
Fig.9).
b. MANUALLY, after a command of the operator, who adds the remote MEP.
For these remote MEPs, the table indicates the identifier of the remote MEP (provided by the
operator) while the MAC Address is set to zero.
After the creation, the remote MEP must be manually set to status Start. The passage of Remote
MEP to the status connected (Conn) will take place when the equipment receives the first CCM
sent by the specific remote MEP (see Fig.9).
When the first CCM is received, the field MAC Address gets the value of the MAC Address of the
remote equipment, source of CCM.
The status of a remote MEP is pointed out in the table by the parameter MEP State and can be:
322
Idle. Initial status of the remote MEP just after its manual insertion in table.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Idle are pointed out in Fig.9.
Start. Initial status of the remote MEP just after it is automatically inserted in the table or status
assumed by the remote MEP after it is enabled (remote MEP manually inserted) or disabled.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Start and the conditions which
cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one change depending on the
type of insertion of the MEP in the RMep table (automatic or manual) as depicted in Fig.9.
Conn. Status the remote MEP reaches from the status Start after an enabling command or at
the reception of the first CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP, if previously recorded
by the operator (see Fig.9).
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Conn and the conditions which
cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are depicted in Fig.9.
Failed. Status the remote MEP reaches when the local MEP does not receive (for a period of 2,5
times the CCM interval) a CCM message from the specific remote MEP, as described at the beginning of the chapter.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Failed and the conditions
which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are depicted in Fig.9.
After the (automatic or manual) insertion of a remote MEP in the table, it can be removed only manually
by the operator.
In WEB CT, the RMep table of a local MEP can be displayed only after the local MEP has been associated to
a VLAN (see Associate a MEP to a VLAN).
Fig.9 OAM-FM - Management of the status of the Remote MEPs in the RMep table
Local MEP
receives
again the
CCMs from
remote MEP
Local MEP
receives the first
CCM sent by the
remote MEP
Remote MEP status
Conn.
Local MEP does
not receive the
CCMs from
remote MEP
anymore
Local MEP
receives
again the
CCMs from
remote MEP
The user
deletes the
remote MEP
(4)
323
CCM
The term CCM (Continuity Check Message) defines the messages which constantly monitor the path of the
service instance pointing out the connection troubles.
CCMs are multicast messages sent by a MEP entity to the other MEP entities belonging to the same MA
(Remote MEPs).
Moreover, CCMs are unidirectional messages (do not need a reply) and are periodically sent.
Within a MA which n MEPs belongs to, every MEP periodically sends a CCM in multicast; every MEP waits
to periodically receive n-1 CCMs.
The missed reception of a CCM by a MEP means the presence of a fault in the path of the service instance
(VLAN).
When a MEP does not receive a CCM message, it goes to status Failed: this status is notified to the other
MEPs setting the field RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) present in the sent CCM message.
In this way, all the MEP entities know the existence of a fault along their own path.
The CCM management in ALCplus2e equipment is strictly bound to the MEP management.
In fact, the configuration parameters of the CCM messages must be set when MEP is created. The user is
required to define:
The time interval used for the transmission of CCMs (CCM interval).
For a correct operation of the CCM messages, the CCM interval must be the same for all the
MEPs of the same VLAN.
Once the MEP has been defined, the enabling of the transmission of CCMs is required.
Then, the user can disable and enable again the transmission of the CCM messages at his wish (see Enable/
disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP) and modify the interval (see Modify the time interval
used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP).
The direction cannot be modified. To do this, remove the MEP from the VLAN and create a new one with
the new values.
In ALCplus2e equipment, the CCM messages (OAM-FM packets) are routed on the VLANs only if the control
of Tag VLan Id is active (Fallback or Secure).
In the CCM messages sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets) is used as:
Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3x with x from 0 to 7 according to the layer of OAM-FM Domain
Source address (Source MAC address): physical address of the equipment which has generated
the CCM message (MAC Address associated to the management LAN of the controller).
LBM
The term LBM (LoopBack Message) defines the LoopBack messages which, once a fault has been detected
through the CCM messages, allow isolate the point where the fault has occurred.
The operation modalities of OAM-FM LoopBack is similar to IP ping.
From a MEP an OAM-FM packet is sent in unicast with a request of Echo Request (LoopBack Message) to a
MIP or MEP belonging to the same MA. The MEP waits for the relevant reply Echo Reply (Loopback Replies)
sent in unicast from the remote maintenance point.
The missed reply to a LBM message indicates the presence of a fault between the MEP which has sent the
message and the maintenance point which has not replied to the message.
The LBM messages are sent after a command from operator (see Send one or more LoopBack messages
(LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP).
The transmission of LoopBack messages requires the setting of:
324
The local MEP, which you wish to send the messages from.
The remote maintenance point, belonging to the same Domain and the same MA of the local
MEP, which you wish to send the messages to. The setting of a:
MEP can be done choosing the MEP in the RMep table or setting the MAC Address of the
equipment where the remote MEP is defined.
MIP can be done setting the MAC Address of the equipment where MIP is defined.
Number of messages (OAM-FM packets - Echo Request) you wish to send in sequence with a
single sending confirmation (minimum 1 maximum 5).
At the end of the operation, a statistics is available with the number of sent packets (Sent Messages), the
number of received correct packets (Valid), the number of packets received out of sequence (Out Of Order)
and the number of packets received with unknown format (Bad MSDU).
ALCplus2e equipment, in the LBM messages sent in unicast, uses as:
Destination address (Destination MAC address): physical address of the addressee of the LoopBack message.
Source address (Source MAC address): physical address of the equipment which has generated
the LoopBack message.
LTM
The term LTM (Link Trace Message) defines the Link Trace messages which allow determining the path
covered by an OAM-FM packet between the end-points of a service instance (VLAN).
The operating modality of OAM-FM Link Trace is similar to TraceRoute IP.
A Link Trace message is sent in multicast from a MEP (local) to a remote MEP, whose physical address must
be known.
In the Link Trace messages, the TTL (Time To Live) field, which indicates the number of equipment of the
specific OAM-FM Domain the packet can pass through before being declared expired, is properly configured.
The LTM messages are captured by all the MEPs-MIPs installed on the same VLAN on the equipment
touched to reach the destination MEP.
Every MEP-MIP, once the message has been intercepted, decreases the TTL field, replies to the originating
MEP with an unicast message and re-transmits the LTM message to the destination MEP.
This operation is repeated until the packet arrives to the addressee remote MEP.
At the end of the operation, the local MEP has acquired the list of the physical addresses (MAC Address) of
the equipment where the Link Trace messages have passed.
The LTM messages, to trace the path between two different MEPs of the same VLAN, are sent after a command by operator (see Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of
the same VLAN).
To trace a path, the operator must set the two path ends:
Local MEP.
Remote MEP. This setting can be done choosing the MEP from the RMep table or setting the MAC
Address of the equipment whose remote MEP has been defined.
The remote MEP, to make the operation being successful, must be in status Conn. (see Fig.9).
Then the operator must send the LTM message (Run Test).
At the end of the operation, the Link Trace will contain the list of the MAC Addresses of the MIPs-MEPs
crossed to reach the remote MEP with the indication of the distance in Hops from the origin MEP.
The LTM messages are sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets), use as:
Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3y with y from 80xF according to the layer of the OAM-FM Domain.
Source address (Source MAC address): physical address of the equipment which has generated
the Link Trace message.
325
MEP 10
VLAN Id:20
MA: Vlan 20
A.2
A.3
Switch
1
2
3
4
MIP
Switch
MEP 11
A.4
Switch
1
2
A
3
4
1
2
3
4
The steps to execute, through the WEB LCT application on every single equipment, are the following:
1. Configure the VLAN with identifier 20 on the 4 equipment (see Create a virtual Lan).
The VLAN must be operating, so beyond being created it is necessary:
Activate the Ethernet ports involved by the VLAN (parameter Rate Control).
Configure properly the transit of the messages in input from the Ethernet port (parameter Port
Based VLAN).
2. Define the OAM-FM Domain with name Test (see Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment) and layer
equal to 5.
The OAM-FM Domain must be defined in every equipment of the Domain Test and the name and the
layer of the Domain must be the same for all pieces of equipment.
3. Associate the MA with name Test 20 (see Associate a MA to a VLAN) to the VLAN.
The MA must be associated to VLAN 20 in every equipment of Domain Test and the name of MA must
be the same for all pieces of equipment.
4. Define the MEPs (see Associate a MEP to a VLAN) in the following way:
Only for equipment A.1, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:
Identifier: 10
Only for equipment A.4, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:
Identifier: 11
5. Enable the transmission of CCM messages for the MEPs created in the previous step (see Enable/
disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP).
After some seconds, the RMep table (see Remote MEPs) relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1) records
the MEP 11 in status Start and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm becomes active.
Differently, the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4) records the MEP 10 in status Start and
the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm becomes active.
6. In RMep tables, enable the remote MEPs (see Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table).
In the RMep table relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1), the remote MEP 11 changes to status Conn and
the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.
In similar mode, in the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4), the remote MEP 10 changes
to status Conn and the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.
326
The configuration of the maintenance area depicted in Fig.10 is completed and the end to end monitoring
of VLAN 20 is active.
At this point, when a fault is detected (activation of the alarm OAM-FM Fail Alarm) or in order to execute
checks on the OAM-FM path, it is possible to use the LTM messages to verify the path of the VLAN or, when
the Fail alarm is detected, it is possible to use the LBM messages for the detection of the interruption point
of the VLAN.
327
S/N Meas
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with radio.
The S/N Meas command displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N), which allows evaluating the
quality of the radio communication channel.
Operations
328
329
PRBS
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure
Activate/reset the PRBS measure
Deactivate the PRBS measure
Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure
GUI
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
330
Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used for the measure.
Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the IDU board (A or B) or of
the expansion (116 or 132).
The enabling of the E1 signal used for the measure determinates also the connector (2Mbit/s
tributary), which a measurement instrument can be connected to for the control of the error rate
by means of the PRBS functionality.
3. ONLY if the enabled the E1 signal, set the tributary in the 2 Mbit/s Selection box.
If the Trib A or Trib B value is not available, the relevant tributary is used as synchronism in output
(see Synchronisation).
4. Press Apply and confirm.
Only if the Enable option is selected a message is displayed informing that the set tributary is immediately enabled to the use and then a message warns you are executing a forcing and displays the current
setting of the timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
Enabling of the E1 signal activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on the forcing is inactive independently from the previous setting.
If the message Operation fail! Wrong user profile! is displayed, check that the user profile can enable
the tributary.
331
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used as pattern for the measure.
Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the IDU board (A or
B) or of the expansion (116 or 132).
332
Radio Loop
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with radio.
The activation of the radio loop can affect the traffic (see Radio loop (info).
1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop.
2. Select the option relevant to the loop that you want to activate.
It is not possible to preset more loops at the same time as the choice of a option automatically disables
the preceding one.
If next to the option there is the box Test Loop Result, this means the equipment is equipped with ODU
ASN. For this ODU type, a Test RF is available (see Execute the test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment
with ODU ASN).
The values RF Loop and RF Loop (ETH not squelched) are available only if the RF loop is supported by
the equipment hardware.
3. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned
on again, the loop results deactivated without taking into account the preceding setting.
333
Execute the test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
Operation available only for equipment provided with ODU ASN (see Test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN (info).
1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop.
2. Select the RF Loop option.
3. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm.
During the execution of the test, the Test Loop box shows the progression of the operation.
The status of the test is pointed out by the Test Loop Result box:
334
Loop Branch <radio branch>. Current status of the radio loops of the specific radio branch:
The values RF Loop and RF Loop (ETH not squelched) are available only if the RF loop is supported by the equipment hardware.
For the equipment in configuration 1+0, it is present the Loop Branch 1 area. For the equipment
in configuration 1+1 or 2x(1+0), there are present the Loop Branch 1 (loops branch 1) and Loop
Branch 2 (loops branch 2) areas.
Push-button
335
336
Test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN (info)
The ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN of old generation was not provided with the RF loop, because not
designed to execute a loop in accordance with the specifications of emission of the spurious signals.
The ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN of new generation (ODU unit with Part. Number GE8xxx) is provided with an internal diagnostics functionality, based on a loop executed in preset operating condition in
such a way to verify the transceiver functionality.
The execution of the test is independent from the type of traffic (TDM, Ethernet, hybrid) and does not need
any external measurement tools.
At the end of the test, the result of the diagnosis is displayed: test executed correctly (ODU operating),
test failed (ODU faulted).
The test is a manual operation (MAN OP), so its execution is subjected to the timeout of the manual operations.
If the timeout:
Is enabled, at the end of the test the condition of Loop RF is preserved until the expiry of the
duration of the MAN OP unless it is removed immediately at the end of the test, as described in
the specific procedure.
Is not enabled, at the end of the test it is necessary to remove the condition of Loop RF, as described in the specific procedure.
If the test is interrupted by the system, a possible reason could be that the set timeout was lower than the
execution time of the test. It is suggested to set the timeout to a value greater than that of execution of
the test.
In case of 1+1 Hot Standby radio configuration systems, the activation of the test on the stand-by branch
involves the loss of the connection of the working branch, because the remote transmitter is switched off.
In case of 1+1 Freq. Div radio configuration systems, the activation of the test on the stand-by branch
involves the degradation or the loss of the connection of the working branch, because even on this one the
same modulation is (mandatory) set.
With:
In case of systems configured with constant peak, it is ensured that the rated power of the connection is
not exceeded during the execution of the test.
337
Radio Switch
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with the radio in protected configuration.
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches
Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)
Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch)
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential)
Modify the Wait Time parameter
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
GUI
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal
functioning mode of the equipment).
Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service.
Branch-2. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 for the service.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Branch option) a message warns that you are
executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on
again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.
338
Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal
functioning mode of the equipment).
Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service.
Branch-2. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 for the service.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Branch option) a message warns that you are
executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on
again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential)
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration (1+1 Hot Standby).
Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not use a
branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.
Branch-1. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the
branch 1.
Branch-2. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the
branch 2.
339
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
Access | Read & Write
WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration (1+1 Hot Standby).
340
Rx Forced Switch. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching
at reception between the service branch and the reserve one:
Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service.
Branch-2. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 for the service.
Tx Forced Switch. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching
at transmission between the service branch and the reserve one:
Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service.
Branch-2. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 for the service.
Tx Preferential. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the function of
preferential branch for the service at transmission:
Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does
not use a branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.
Branch-1. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment
use the branch 1.
Branch-2. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment
use the branch 2.
Wait Time (Tx Preferential). Time period during which the service is kept on the non-preferential branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the continue
switch between the two branches in case of fleeting alarms.
WARNING Tx Forced Switch, Tx Preferential and Wait Time parameters are available only for the equipment
in 1+1 isofrequential configuration (1+1 Hot Standby). For the 1+1 heterofrequential configuration (1+1
Freq. Div), the parameters are not available because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit at the same time
because the selection of the signal is executed at reception.
Push-button
341
342
SWITCH
343
STM-1
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the protection of the STM-1 is active (MSP mode - see Configurator).
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch
Modify the management of the STM-1 switch
Modify the logic of STM-1 switch
Set the primary STM-1 as preferential
Modify the Wait Time parameter
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
GUI
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operation of the switch).
Forced. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1: the switch will be never executed,
independently from the type of alarm which can raise.
Manual. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1: the switch is executed only in
case of alarms of type Signal Fail or Signal Degrade.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Lock Out, Forced or Manual option) a message
warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on
again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.
344
Unidirectional. The switch logic (MSP protection) is managed at level of local equipment, which
commands the switch without notifying this situation to the remote equipment.
Bidirectional. The switch logic is managed at Link level: the local equipment agrees the switch
with the remote equipment.
Not Revertive. The primary STM-1 is not preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary) the
secondary STM-1 remains active even when the alarms that caused the switch clear.
Revertive. The primary STM-1 is preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary), when the
alarms clear, the primary stream is restored as active STM-1.
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
Access | Read & Write
345
Switch Status area. Operating status of the switch. The STM-1 in operation is pointed out by
green box and wording Active, while the STM-1 in StandBy by the grey box and the wording
StandBy.
Primary STM-1 (Switch Status area.). Main STM-1.
Protection STM-1 (Switch Status area.). Secondary STM-1.
Wtr Time (Min.). Time (expressed in minutes) during which an alarm condition must persist
on the main stream so that the service is restored on it.
Protection Mode. Management mode of the primary STM-1 as preferential:
Not Revertive. The primary STM-1 is not preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary) the secondary STM-1 remains active even when the alarms that caused the switch
clear.
Revertive. The primary STM-1 is preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary),
when the alarms clear, the primary stream is restored as active STM-1
Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operation of the switch).
Forced. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1: the switch is never executed, independently from the type of alarm that can raise.
Manual. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1: the switch is executed
only in case of alarms of type Signal Fail or Signal Degrade.
Unidirectional. The switch logic (MSP protection) is managed at level of local equipment, which commands the switch without notifying this situation to the remote
equipment.
Bidirectional. The switch logic is managed at link level: the local equipment agrees
the switch with the remote equipment.
Push-button
346
347
erential) STM-1, but this is postponed by n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies
that the alarms has not raised again on the preferential STM-1. At the end of the Wait Time period, if the
alarm has not raised again, the service is restored on the primary STM-1. On the contrary, the switch is
postponed by other n seconds during which the system verifies the alarm has not raised again and so on.
In any moment the operator can Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration.
348
Nodal
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
WARNING Command available only if the protection of the Nodal Bus is active (see Configurator)
The Nodal command manages the switch of the protected Nodal Bus.
Operations
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch
Modify the management of the nodal switch
Modify the Wait Time parameter
Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
GUI
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operation of the switch).
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the NBUS1 or NBUS2 option) a message warns that
you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on
again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.
349
Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait
Time expiration
Access | Read & Write
350
Wtr Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which an alarm condition must persist on the
preferential NBUS connection so that the service is restored on it.
Forced Switch. Management modality of the switch:
Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operation of the switch).
Push-button
351
352
USER INPUT
353
The Local User Input command manages the local User Input configuration.
Operations
Normally Open. The User Input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its
terminal is referred to ground.
Normally Close. The User Input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its
terminal is open.
354
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local User Input
Access | Read & Write
Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the User Input.
Status, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to a status signal.
Warning, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Warning level.
Minor, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Minor level.
Major, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Major level.
Critical, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Critical level.
355
Active (light blue box). User Input alarm activated and with Warning severity level.
Active (yellow box). User Input alarm activated and with Minor severity level.
Active (orange box). User Input alarm activated and with Major severity level.
Active (red box). User Input alarm activated and with Critical severity level.
Severity. Status/seriousness of the alarm created at the activation of the User Input:
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respectively of
level Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
Normally Open. The User Input is considered active when its terminal is referred to
ground.
Normally Close. The User Input is considered active when its terminal is open.
Push-button
356
357
The Remote User Input command manages the remote User Input configuration.
Operations
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote User Input
Access | Read & Write
Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the User Input.
Status, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to a status signal.
Warning, to:
358
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Warning level.
Minor, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Minor level.
Major, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Major level.
Critical, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Critical level.
359
Parameters
Active (light blue box). User Input alarm activated and with Warning severity level.
Active (yellow box). User Input alarm activated and with Minor severity level.
Active (orange box). User Input alarm activated and with Major severity level.
Active (red box). User Input alarm activated and with Critical severity level.
Severity. Status/seriousness of the alarm created at the activation of the User Input:
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respectively of
level Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
Push-button
360
USER OUTPUT
Access | Read Only, Read & Write
Open. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are
closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open
Closed. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are
open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.
361
Alarm Synthesis box, to associate the group of alarms, which a specific severity level corresponds to, to the UO. Select the wished severity level or the levels:
Alarm Synthesis Warning. Alarms, which the Warning severity corresponds to.
Alarm Synthesis Minor. Alarms, which the Minor severity corresponds to.
Alarm Synthesis Major. Alarms, which the Major severity corresponds to.
Alarm Synthesis Critical. Alarms, which the Critical severity corresponds to.
Radio Branch box, to associate to the UO the group of local or remote equipment alarms (ODU).
Select the group or the groups of wished alarms:
Radio Branch Local Odu <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the specific radio branch of
the ODU section of the local equipment.
Radio Branch Remote Odu <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the specific radio branch
of the ODU section of the remote equipment.
Signals available only for equipment with the radio equipped (see Configurator).
Radio Equipment box, to associate to the UO the group of local or remote equipment alarms
(IDU). Select the group or the groups of wished alarms:
Radio Equipment Local IDU A. Alarms relevant to LIM section of the local equipment.
Radio Equipment Remote IDU <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the LIM section of the
remote equipment connected with the specific radio branch.
User Input box, to associated to the UO one or more local (User Input ) and/or remote (User
Input Remote) User Inputs. Select the wished User Inputs.
The selection of a signal is indicated by the check sign inside the box. Its deactivation removes the
check sign.
The selection/deselection of a group automatically selects/deselects all the relevant signals.
5. Press Ok.
6. Press Apply changes and confirm.
362
363
Mapped. One or more signals are associated to UO (group of alarms and/or User Input). Press Mapping to verify the signals.
Open. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open
Closed. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays
contacts are open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.
Map. UO is enabled to the association of one or more signals (group of alarms and/
or User Inputs).
Push-button
364
ALARMS LIST
Tab.15 indicates the list of the alarms relevant to the equipment.
The alarms are not listed in alphabetical order but they are grouped according to the corresponding parts
of the equipment.
Equipment
User Input
Common
Eth Lan
IDU
Node
P.M. G.828
P.M. G.829 B1
P.M. G.829 B2-M1
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. Tx Power
P.M. VC-12 G.828
P.M. ACM
Plug-in module
Radio
RIM
RT
SETS
SNTP
STM-1
Unit
Vc4
Vc12
For each alarm, the wording present in the Events area (see Equipment status area) of the WEB CT page
is displayed.
Some alarms have some wordings in italic contained between the symbols < >. They represent a variable.
365
366
Events alarms
PWE3: Local PSN Down channel <channel label>
PWE3: Remote PSN Down channel <channel label>
Eth Lan
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Link Loss Forwarding Alarm
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Loss of Signal Alarm
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Master-Slave Configuration fault Alarm
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Physical Coding Sublayer Sync Alarm
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Unresolved Autonegotiation Alarm
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Link Aggregation LACP protocol down
IDU
IDU Board IDU Temperature
IDU Board Trib.-<tributary number> [<tributary label>] Rx AIS Alarm
IDU Board Trib.-<tributary number> [<tributary label>] Signal loss Alarm
IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Demodulator Fail Alarm
IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Modulator Fail Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] ODU-IDU Communication fail Alarm
Local [<radio branch label>] Alarm Synthesis
REMOTE IDU Radio <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Alarm Synthesis
IDU Trib.-<tributary number> [<tributary label>] Re-Timing Alarm
IDU <tributary number> [<tributary label>] Protection Alarm
IDU <tributary label> Ais Alarm
IDU <tributary label> Ber5 Alarm
IDU <tributary label> Out of Frame Alarm
IDU <tributary label> Out of Multiframe Alarm
Node
Node <bus number> Signal loss Alarm
Node <bus number> Loss of frame Alarm
Node <bus number> MS AIS Alarm
Node <bus number> Check identifier Alarm
Ethernet Nodal Configuration Mismatch <Lan1, Lan2, Lan1&Lan2, Nodal Config. Parameters>
P.M. G.828
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 15Mcounter ES threshold cross Alarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 15Mcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 15Mcounter SES threshold cross Alarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 24Hcounter ES threshold cross Alarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 24Hcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 24Hcounter SES threshold cross Alarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) UAS Alarm
367
Events alarms
P.M. G.829 B1
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) UAS Alarm
P.M. G.829 B2-M1
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) UAS Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) UAS-BIDI Alarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) UAS-FE Alarm
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts3 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts4 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts5 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts3 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts4 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts5 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. Tx Power
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts3 threshold cross Alarm
368
Events alarms
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts4 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts3 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts4 threshold cross Alarm
P.M. VC-12 G.828
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS-BIDI Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS-FE Alarm
P.M. ACM
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 4QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 8PSK threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 16QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 32QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 64QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 128QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 256QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 4QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 8PSK threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 16QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 32QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 64QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 128QAM threshold cross Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 256QAM threshold cross Alarm
369
Events alarms
Plug-in module
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Fail Alarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Loss of Signal Alarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Mismatch Alarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Status
Radio
[<radio branch label>] PRBS Fail Alarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Adaptive Modulation Reduced Capacity Notification
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Id. Alarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Telemetry Fail Alarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Transmitter Switch on Remote Terminal BER
RADIO SWITCH 1A [<radio branch label>] Reserve Radio Branch Selected in Revertive Mode
RIM
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] REMOTE RIM Alarm Synthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Open Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Short Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] LOCAL RIM Alarm Synthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RIM Power Supply Alarm
RT
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT IDU-ODU Communication fail Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT If Fail Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT LOCAL ODU Alarm Synthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT REMOTE ODU Alarm Synthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Vco Fail Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Rx Power Low Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Tx Power Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx If Out Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Warning
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Active Status
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Tx Active Status
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] XPIC Fail
SETS
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Active Status
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Drift Alarm
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> LTI Alarm
IDU Sets Free Running Status
IDU Sets Holdover Status
370
Events alarms
BASE BAND Sets T0 Fail Alarm
BASE BAND Sets T4 Fail Alarm
SNTP
SNTP servers lost Alarm
STM-1
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> B2 Excessive Ber Alarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> B2 Signal Degrade Alarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Loss of Frame Alarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Loss of Signal Alarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Ms Ais Alarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Ms Rdi Alarm
Unit
<unit name> Unit Fail Alarm
<unit name> Unit Hw Mismatch Alarm
<unit name> Unit Missing Alarm
<unit name> Unit Not Responding Alarm
<unit name> Unit Sw Mismatch Alarm
Vc4
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> AU-4 AIS Alarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> AU-4 Loss of Pointer Alarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> B3 Excessive Ber Alarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> B3 Signal Degrade Alarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> RDI Alarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> Signal Label Mismatch Alarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> Unequipped Alarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> Loss Of Multiframe Alarm
Vc12
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Excessive BER Alarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 RDI Alarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Signal Degrade Alarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 TU LOP Alarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 TU Path AIS Alarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Unequipped Alarm
371
(1)
372
OPERATIONS LIST
A
ACL
Verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List .................................................................. 47
ACM profile 4QAM Strong, enable/disable ..................................................................................119
Adaptive modulation configuration parameters, verify .................................................................117
ATPC
Functioning status, verify/modify .........................................................................................296
Intervention threshold, verify/modify ...................................................................................297
Maximum output power value at the transmitter, verify/modify ...............................................297
Range of the ATPC regulation, verify/modify .........................................................................297
Table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile,
display .............................................................................................................................298
D
Default Gateway
Running Default Gateway
Verify ........................................................................................................................... 58
Stored Default Gateway
Verify ........................................................................................................................... 61
E
E1
Label, modify ....................................................................................................................245
Loop, activate/deactivate ...................................................................................................246
Management status of LOS alarm, modify .............................................................................246
Status and configuration, verify ...........................................................................................245
Use, activate/deactivate .....................................................................................................245
ELP
Verify the status of the LANs ...............................................................................................232
Equipment addresses (Ethernet port, LCT port, MAC address, IP Over OSI port, NSAP), verify ........... 42
Equipment firmware
Switch the memory benches ................................................................................................ 92
Verify the version ............................................................................................................... 92
Equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, firmware version, etc.), verify ............................ 42
Equipment software reset .................................................................................................... 42, 47
Equipment units (type, code, version and functional status), verify ................................................ 42
373
Ethernet Switch
Address learning modality in MAC Table, verify/modify ...........................................................174
Aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table ..............................................................174
Display the MAC Table .......................................................................................................174
Emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue, verify/modify ...........................176
Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field, verify/modify ............................................................173
Hysteresis of the LLF modality, verify/modify ........................................................................176
Maximum size of the accepted packet, verify/modify ..............................................................173
Output queue of a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field, verify/assign .................................176
Output queue of a packet according to its Tag 802.1p, verify/assign .........................................176
Reset the MAC Table ..........................................................................................................175
Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch ......................................................................175
Execute the test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN ..............................................334
G
G.8032
Associate a VLAN to an ERP instance ....................................................................................240
Change the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances ..........................236
Change the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance .....................237
Enable/disable the manual commands to block a port of an ERP instance ..................................239
Enable/disable the Ring Protection modality for an ERP instance ..............................................238
Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance .................................................................239
Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance ............................................239
Verify the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances ............................236
Verify the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance ........................237
Verify to which ERP instance the traffic of each equipment VLAN is routed .................................240
L
LAN
Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism for the LAN, verify/
modify .............................................................................................................................190
Automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN, verify/modify .......................189
Behaviour of the LAN towards the packets in output, verify/modify ..........................................193
Connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP), verify/modify ..............................................................197
Control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the LAN, verify/modify ............................193
Default VID value of the LAN, verify/modify ..........................................................................192
ELP for the LAN, enable/disable ...........................................................................................198
Enable manually the laser transmission ................................................................................201
Enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality
and the transmission speed used by the LAN, verify/modify ....................................................188
Enabling status of the flow control of the LAN, verify/modify ...................................................188
Enabling status of the LAN, verify/modify .............................................................................187
Enabling status of the laser, verify .......................................................................................200
Enabling status of the LLF modality of the LAN, verify/modify ..................................................196
Execute the test laser functioning status ...............................................................................201
374
Force the value of VID of the LAN to the default value ............................................................194
Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN, verify/modify .............................................187
Loop on line side of the LAN, activate/deactivate ...................................................................196
Maximum throughput of data in output from LAN port, verify/modify ........................................189
Operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN, verify/modify .............................190
Ports through which the messages in input from the LAN, verify/modify ....................................194
Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the output queue,
verify/modify ....................................................................................................................195
Priority of the LAN (STP/ELP), verify/modify ..........................................................................197
Rate Limiter
Create a PIRL instance ..................................................................................................191
Delete a PIRL instance ..................................................................................................192
Enable/disable a PIRL instance .......................................................................................192
Modify a PIRL instance ..................................................................................................192
Verify the existing PIRL instances ...................................................................................191
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN ................................................................190
Rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN, verify/modify ............................................189
Status and configuration of the laser, verify ..........................................................................199
Status of the LAN in relation to the ELP, verify ......................................................................198
Status of the LAN in relation to the STP, verify ......................................................................196
Status of the LAN in relation to the Trunking mode, verify .......................................................199
STP for the LAN, enable/disable ...........................................................................................197
Transmission mode of the laser, modify ................................................................................200
Trunking for the LAN, enable/disable ....................................................................................199
Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LAN which, in output, the Tag is
added to, verify/modify ......................................................................................................195
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan ...........................................................195
LAN 3, LAN 4
Interface type of the LAN, verify/modify ...............................................................................190
Lan Statistics
Activate/deactivate the division by 1000 of the counter results ................................................302
Reset the counters results ......................................................................................... 302, 305
Verify the counters of the Ethernet ports subdivided by each port ............................................302
Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports ................................................305
Link identification number, verify/modify ...................................................................................120
Local User Input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity ...............................................................355
Name, modify ...................................................................................................................354
Rest condition, modify ........................................................................................................354
Status and configuration, verify ...........................................................................................354
Lower threshold of the modulation, verify/ modify ......................................................................119
M
MAN. OP
Verify the active manual operations ...................................................................................... 34
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout ........................................................................... 34
375
N
Nodal switch
Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration .........................................................................................................................350
Modify the switch management ...........................................................................................349
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..........................................................................................350
Verify the configuration parameters .....................................................................................349
Verify the switch status ......................................................................................................349
Node
Belonging of the equipment to a node, verify/modify ..............................................................112
Number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams), verify/modify ...............................119
Number of high priority E1, verify/modify ..................................................................................119
O
OAM
Associate a MA to a VLAN ...................................................................................................309
Associate a MEP to a VLAN ..................................................................................................309
Characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain, verify .......................................................................308
Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table ...............................................................................312
Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table ................................................................................311
Enable/disable the CCM messages for a MEP .........................................................................310
Insert a remote MEP in RMep table ......................................................................................311
Modify the time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP .....................310
OAM-FM Domain of equipment, define ..................................................................................308
OAM-FM Domain of equipment, remove ................................................................................308
Remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN ..........................................................................................310
Remove a remote MEP from RMep table ...............................................................................312
Send one or more Loop Back messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP ........................................312
Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP
of the same VLAN ..............................................................................................................313
376
P
PM
Activate one or more measures ............................................................................................ 63
Deactivate one or more measures ........................................................................................ 64
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio) ................................................ 70
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of a measure ................................................................ 65
Reset the values of the control parameters of a measure ......................................................... 64
Set the thresholds of the control parameters of a measure ....................................................... 65
Verify the results of the PM measures ................................................................................... 64
Verify the status of the measures ......................................................................................... 63
Port Configuration
Ethernet port configuration, verify ........................................................................................ 45
IP over OSI port configuration, verify .................................................................................... 46
LCT PPP port configuration, verify ......................................................................................... 45
Line EOC port configuration, verify ........................................................................................ 46
Radio 1A port configuration, verify ........................................................................................ 46
Radio 2A port configuration, verify ........................................................................................ 46
Radio port configuration, verify ............................................................................................ 45
Power profile of the RF transmitter, verify/modify .......................................................................118
PRBS
Activate/reset the measure .................................................................................................330
Deactivate the measure .....................................................................................................330
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure .................................................................331
Modify the pattern type used for the measure .......................................................................330
Verify the configuration parameters of the measure ...............................................................330
Verify the status of the measure ..........................................................................................330
Priority of the dynamic E1, verify/modify ...................................................................................120
R
Radio branch label, verify/modify .............................................................................................128
Radio configuration, verify/modify ............................................................................................108
Radio loop
Activate ...........................................................................................................................333
377
Deactivate ........................................................................................................................334
Verify the status ................................................................................................................333
Radio port
Automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the Radio port, verify/modify ..............220
Behaviour of the Radio port towards the packets in output, verify/modify ..................................221
Connection cost of the Radio port (STP), verify/modify ...........................................................224
Control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the Radio port, verify/modify ....................221
Default VID value of the Radio port, verify/modify .................................................................220
Enabling status of the Radio port, verify/modify .....................................................................220
Force the value of Vid of the Radio port to the default value ....................................................222
Ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port, verify/modify ...........................222
Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the Radio port to the output queue,
verify/modify ....................................................................................................................222
Priority of the Radio port (STP), verify/modify .......................................................................224
Status of the Radio port in relation to the STP, verify .............................................................223
Status of the Radio port in relation to the Trunking mode, verify ..............................................224
STP for the Radio port, enable/disable ..................................................................................224
Trunking for the Radio port, enable/disable ...........................................................................225
Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the Radio port which, in output, the Tag
is added to, verify/modify ...................................................................................................223
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the Radio port ..................................223
Radio switch
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .............340
Modify the management of the switching in reception .............................................................338
Modify the management of the switching in transmission ........................................................339
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission ..................................................339
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..........................................................................................339
Verify the configuration parameters of the switches ...............................................................338
Verify the switches status ...................................................................................................338
Reference band/modulation
Modify .............................................................................................................................118
Verify ..............................................................................................................................117
Remote User Input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity ...............................................................358
Name, modify ...................................................................................................................358
Status and configuration, verify ...........................................................................................358
Resolution of the received power (Prx), verify/modify ..................................................................296
Resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx), verify/modify .............................................................296
RF channel, verify/modify ........................................................................................................294
Routing Table
Running Routing Table
Verify ........................................................................................................................... 58
Stored Routing Table
Verify ........................................................................................................................... 61
378
S
S/N measure
Update the value ...............................................................................................................328
Verify the value .................................................................................................................328
SD
Automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU ......................................... 83
Automatic update of the equipment sw from SD memory ......................................................... 85
Copy the equipment sw from SD memory to controller (Sw Dwl SD) .......................................... 86
Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from SD memory .................................. 86
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory (data + sw) ..................................... 86
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench after an automatic sw
update from SD memory ..................................................................................................... 86
Force the restore, from SD memory to controller, of the configuration data and of the
equipment sw .................................................................................................................... 86
Status and configuration, verify ............................................................................................ 83
Security
Activate the equipment management in Not Secure Mode ........................................................ 97
Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode .............................................................. 96
Active the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode) ................... 97
Configure the SSH protocol .................................................................................................. 97
Verify the security protocols of the equipment (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS, SNMPv3) .............................. 96
SNTP functionality
Verify the status ................................................................................................................. 78
Status of the local/remote synchronization protocol, verify/modify ................................................129
Status of the STM-1 Bulk function, verify/modify ........................................................................140
STM-1
Alarms, verify ...................................................................................................................250
B2 Excessive BER alarm threshold, verify/modify ...................................................................251
B2 Signal Degrade alarm threshold, verify/modify ..................................................................251
Enable manually the laser transmission ................................................................................253
Enabling status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte, verify/modify ...................................................250
Enabling status of the laser, modify .....................................................................................252
Execute the laser functioning status test ...............................................................................253
Loop, verify/modify ...........................................................................................................249
Sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier, verify/modify ............250
Status and configuration of the laser, verify ..........................................................................251
Status, verify/modify .........................................................................................................249
Transmission mode of the laser, modify ................................................................................252
Transport status of the bytes of SOH frame on an E1 Radio channel, verify/modify .....................253
STM-1 switch
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration ...................345
Modify the logic of switch ...................................................................................................345
Modify the switch management ...........................................................................................344
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..........................................................................................345
Set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential .......................................................................345
Verify the configuration parameters .....................................................................................344
379
T
TDM matrix
Delete one or more connections ..........................................................................................275
Disable an Auto-Loop .........................................................................................................276
Display the connections of the equipment in graphic format ....................................................272
Display the connections of the equipment in table format ........................................................272
Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) ..............................................................275
Execute a Pass Through connection ......................................................................................274
380
U
Upper threshold of the modulation, verify/modify .......................................................................119
User Output
Force the activation ...........................................................................................................362
Functioning mode of the relay contacts, modify .....................................................................361
Name, modify ...................................................................................................................361
Remove the forcing ...........................................................................................................363
Signal coupled, modify .......................................................................................................362
Status and configuration, verify ...........................................................................................361
Users list
Force the logout of a user .................................................................................................... 27
Verify the users connected to the equipment .......................................................................... 27
V
VC-12
Alarms status, verify ..........................................................................................................267
Enabling status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte, verify/modify ...................................................267
Sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J2 Trace Identifier, verify/modify ............267
Signal Label value, verify/modify .........................................................................................268
VC-12 Excessive BER alarm threshold, verify/modify ..............................................................265
VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm threshold, verify/modify .............................................................265
VC-4
Alarms, verify ...................................................................................................................260
B3 Excessive BER alarm threshold, verify/modify ...................................................................260
B3 Signal Degrade alarm threshold, verify/modify ..................................................................260
Enabling status of the J1 Trace Identifier, verify/modify ..........................................................259
381
W
Wake Up functionality
Verify the status ................................................................................................................. 78
WEB CT page
Automatic closing of the page .............................................................................................. 20
Close the page ................................................................................................................... 20
Open more pages ............................................................................................................... 19
Open the page ................................................................................................................... 19
WEB LCT user
Forbid the WEB LCT user connecting to equipment in Configuration mode .................................. 39
Permit the WEB LCT user connecting to equipment in Configuration mode .................................. 39
Verify the enabling status of the WEB LCT-equipment connection in Configuration mode .............. 39
X
Xpic
Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch ........................................................136
Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) .........................................................137
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection ....................................................................137
Restore the XPIC function of the single branch ......................................................................137
Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function ........................................................136
382
PARAMETERS LIST
ACL
IP Address ........................................... 53
Mask .................................................. 53
Name ................................................. 53
Permission ........................................... 53
E
E1
AIS Alarm ...........................................247
Status ................................................. 53
Enable ...............................................247
Profile ................................................122
East-West ...............................................114
Unit .................................................... 93
HW Ver. .............................................. 44
Par Part Number ................................... 44
Part Number ........................................ 44
Real Type ............................................ 44
383
L
LAN
802.1Q
Default Vid ....................................206
Ethernet Switch
802.1p Priority Management .................179
Egress Priority Policy ............................179
LLF Hysteresis .....................................180
MAC Addr. Aging Time .........................179
MAC Learning Vid basis ........................179
Max Packet size (Byte) .........................179
QinQ ETH type 0x ................................179
VLan
Default VLan ID ..............................182
Disable ..........................................181
Label ............................................181
Lan1 .............................................181
Lan2 .............................................181
Lan3 .............................................181
Lan4 .............................................181
Port B ...........................................182
Radio port .....................................182
Tagged .........................................181
Unmodif. .......................................181
Untag. ..........................................181
VLanID .........................................181
Exclude 4QAM Strong ...............................121
Master/Slave ......................................202
Port Role ............................................204
Priority
Default Priority ...............................207
384
Rate .............................................205
Jabbers ..............................................303
Status ...........................................204
Unicast .........................................205
Speed ................................................204
Speed/Duplex .....................................203
STP
Priority ..........................................209
Role ..............................................208
Status ...........................................209
STP/ELP ........................................208
Value ............................................209
Version .........................................209
Trunking
Partner Id ......................................210
Rx Pck Cnt .....................................210
Status ...........................................209
Trunk/LACP ...................................209
Label .................................................356
Severity .............................................356
Lan Stat.Summary
Status ................................................356
MCM
BW Tx Type ........................................133
Collisions ............................................303
TX Period ...........................................133
TX VLan ID .........................................133
Measurements Resolution
Prx ....................................................299
Ptx ....................................................299
Nodal switch
Forced Switch .....................................351
385
OAM .......................................................319
Radio ............................................. 52
Radio 1A ........................................ 53
Radio 2A ........................................ 53
Level .................................................314
LCT PPP
IP PPP Address ................................ 49
IP Unnumbered ............................... 50
PC IP Address ................................. 49
Line EOC
EOC ............................................... 52
RMEP
IP Address ...................................... 51
IP NetMask ..................................... 51
MEP Id ..........................................316
IP Unnumbered ............................... 52
Radio
IP Address ...................................... 50
VLAN
CCM Int. .......................................315
IP NetMask ..................................... 50
IP Unnumbered ............................... 50
Label ............................................314
LAN... ...........................................315
Radio 1A
MA Name ......................................314
IP Address ...................................... 51
MEP ID ..........................................315
IP NetMask ..................................... 51
Port... ...........................................315
IP Unnumbered ............................... 51
PPP Mode ....................................... 51
Radio 2A
IP Address ...................................... 51
IP NetMask ..................................... 51
IP Unnumbered ............................... 51
PRBS
2 Mbit/s Selection ................................332
BER ...................................................332
E1 Signal ............................................332
IP Address ...................................... 48
Errors ................................................332
386
Ring Protection
CFM/CCM Interval ................................241
PWE3 .....................................................114
Domain
Level ............................................241
Name ............................................241
G.8032 Timers
Guard (ms) ....................................241
Radio ......................................................113
Ring 1,Ring 2
802.1Q
Default Vid ....................................227
MA Name ......................................242
MEP ID ..........................................242
Ring Name .....................................242
Port ...................................................226
Priority
Status ...........................................242
VLan ID .........................................242
VLan/Ring Binding
STP
Label ............................................243
VLan ID .........................................243
Destination ..................................... 59
Hop ............................................... 59
Interface ........................................ 59
Net Mask ........................................ 59
Trunking
Protocol .......................................... 59
Trunk/LACP ...................................230
Radio switch
Destination ..................................... 62
Hop ............................................... 62
Interface ........................................ 62
Tx Preferential ....................................341
RT PSU ...................................................299
Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold .................132
S
S/N ........................................................329
SD
Automatic data restore from SD ............. 87
387
Radio 2A ............................................141
Direction ............................................346
MSP Protection ....................................346
Primary STM-1 ....................................346
Protection Mode ..................................346
Protection STM-1 .................................346
Authentication ..................................... 99
STP
Force Version ......................................233
Forward Delay .....................................233
Hello Time ..........................................233
LAN 1 ................................................234
LAN 2 ................................................234
LAN 3 ................................................234
LAN 4 ................................................234
Port B ................................................234
Priority ...............................................235
STM-1
Alarms ...............................................255
Status ................................................234
Version ..............................................234
Synchronisation
Alarms ...............................................154
E1 Retiming ........................................159
Enabled ..............................................155
Forced Switch .....................................157
Hold Off Time ......................................154
Type .............................................255
Internal ..............................................156
Nodal 1 ..............................................156
Nodal 2 ..............................................156
388
STM-1 switch
Priority ...............................................157
RADIO 1A ...........................................156
RADIO 2A ...........................................156
Rx Quality ..........................................157
Source ...............................................157
Status Control .....................................154
STM-1 ................................................156
STM-1 1 .............................................156
STM-1 2 .............................................156
Tx Transmitter .........................................299
STM-1/NODAL A ..................................156
STM-1/NODAL B ..................................156
Sync Alarm .........................................159
Sync Loss ...........................................157
T0 Current ..........................................155
T2/T3 1 ..............................................156
User
T2/T3-2 .............................................156
T4 Current ..........................................155
User Output
T4 Squelch .........................................154
T4-T0 ................................................154
TE LAN-A ...........................................156
Label .................................................364
TE LAN-B ...........................................156
Linked To ...........................................364
Tx Quality ..........................................157
State .................................................364
Status ................................................364
V
T
VC-12
TDM Matrix
Alarms ...............................................269
Channel .............................................281
Connection .........................................282
J2 Path Trace
Expected .......................................269
Path Protection
Active ...........................................277
Received .......................................269
Sent .............................................269
Status ...........................................269
Signal Label
Expected .......................................269
Stand-by .......................................277
Sent .............................................269
VC-4
Alarms ...............................................262
B3 Excessive BER Threshold ..................263
389
W
Wake Up
Gosip Address ...................................... 80
NE Location ......................................... 80
NMS IP Address ................................... 80
Status ................................................. 80
Timeout (Minutes) ................................ 80
X
Xpic
Fault Management Procedure ................138
Radio 1A ............................................138
Radio 2A ............................................138
Remote Xpic Proc. Radio 1A Tx Off .........138
Remote Xpic Proc. Radio 2A Tx Off .........138
Xpic Proc. Block on Radio 1A .................138
Xpic Proc. Block on Radio 2A .................138
390
ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the company manufacturing the product.
391
392